Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 337

Reinforced Concrete Design Fifth Edition

CHAPTER
MATERIALS AND
MECHANICS OF BENDING
• A. J. Clark School of Engineering •Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering

Part I – Concrete Design and Analysis

By

1a
FALL 2002 Dr . Ibrahim. Assakkaf

ENCE 355 - Introduction to Structural Design


Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering
University of Maryland, College Park

CHAPTER 1a. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 1

Concrete
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Concrete is a mixture of cement, fine


and coarse aggregates, and water.
Q Water is the key ingredient for chemical
reaction for curing.

Add Water

Cement + Aggregates = Concrete

1
CHAPTER 1a. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 2

Concrete
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Concrete Ingredients

CHAPTER 1a. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 3

Concrete
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Cement
– Cement is a material that has the adhesive
and cohesive properties necessary to bond
inert aggregates into a solid mass of
adequate strength and durability.
Q Aggregates
– The bulk of the concrete mix consists of
the fine and coarse aggregates.

2
CHAPTER 1a. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 4

Concrete
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Concrete Strength
– The resulting concrete strength and
durability are a function of the proportions
of the mix as well as other factors, such as
the the concrete placing, finishing, and
curing history.
– Compressive strength of concrete is
relatively high.
– However, its tensile strength is small as
compared with its compressive strength.

CHAPTER 1a. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 5

Concrete
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Concrete Strength (cont’d)


– Hence, steel reinforcing rods, which have
high tensile strength and compressive
strength, are used in combination with
concrete.
– The steel will resist the tension.
– While the concrete will resist the
compression.

3
CHAPTER 1a. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 6

Concrete
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Concrete Strength (cont’d)


– Reinforced Concrete Beam
y
M

Compressive Stess
Neutral Axis x

Tensile Stress

Figure 1

CHAPTER 1a. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 7

Concrete
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Concrete Strength (cont’d)


– Reinforced Concrete Beam
Figure 2

Dead and Live Loads

4
CHAPTER 1a. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 8

Concrete
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Concrete Strength (cont’d)


– Reinforced Concrete Beam
M = 35 kip ⋅ in

4 in. 12 in.

4 in. 5 in.
6 in.
6 in.
5 in. 6 in.
6 in. Figure 3

CHAPTER 1a. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 9

Concrete
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Concrete Strength (cont’d)


– Reinforced Concrete Beam
Figure 4
b b

x · 1
x σ


2
d N.A.
d-x
Fx

n As
(a) (b) (c)

5
CHAPTER 1a. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 10

Concrete
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Concrete Strength (cont’d)


– Reinforced Concrete Beam

–Concrete is very weak in tension, so


it will crack below the neutral surface
and the steel rods will carry the entire
tensile load.
–The upper part of the concrete beam
will carry the compressive load.

CHAPTER 1a. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 11

The ACI Building Code


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q ACI = American Concrete Institute


– The design and construction of concrete
buildings is controlled by
“ Building Code Requirements for
Structural Concrete (ACI 318-02) and
Commentary (318R-02)”
– The code itself has no legal status,
however, it has been incorporated into the
building code of almost all states.
– When incorporated, it has official sanction.

6
CHAPTER 1a. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 12

Cement and Water


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Hydraulic Cement:
– Water is added to hydraulic cement for the
chemical reaction of hydration to take
place.
– In the process of hydration, the cement
sets and bonds the fresh concrete into one
mass.
– Portland Cement
Calcium and Aluminum Silicates
Limestone materials provide Calcium Dioxide, CaO
Clays provides Silicon dioxide, SiO2, and Aluminum
Oxide, AL2O3

CHAPTER 1a. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 13

Cement and Water


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Cement is marketed in bulk or in 94-lb


(1-ft3) bags

Q Water Cement Ratio:


– The ratio of the amount of water to the
amount of cement by weight

7
CHAPTER 1a. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 14

Cement and Water


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

– The ratio can be expressed in terms of


gallons of water per bag of cement.
Q Requirements
– For complete hydration of cement in a
mix, a water/cement ratio of
• 0.35 to 0.40, or
• 4 to 4.5 gal.bag
is required.

CHAPTER 1a. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 15

Aggregates
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Aggregates occupy approximately 70%


to 75% of the volume of the hardened
mass.
Q The more densely the aggregate can
packed, the better are the strength and
durability.
Q Types of Aggregates:
– Fine: sand (pass No. 4 sieve)
– Coarse: particles (retained in No. 4 Sieve)

8
CHAPTER 1a. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 16

Concrete in Compression
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q As was mentioned earlier, compressive


strength of concrete is relatively high.
Q The compressive strength of concrete is
'
denoted by f c .
'
Q Units commonly used for f c :
– Pounds per square inch (psi)
– Kips per square inch (ksi)

CHAPTER 1a. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 17

Concrete in Compression
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Compression Tests and Stress-Strain


Diagram
Compression Ave. Axial Stress

Compressive
Tensile

Ave. Axial Strain

Figure 5

9
CHAPTER 1a. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 18

Concrete in Compression
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Concrete Compressive Strength


Figure 6

CHAPTER 1a. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 19

Concrete in Compression
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Concrete Compressive Strength


– The curves of Fig. 6 represent the result of
compression tests on 28-day standard
cylinders for varying design mix.
'
– f c is not the stress that exists in the
specimen at failure but rather which occurs
at a strain of 0.002 in/in.
'
– 28-day concrete strength f c range from
2500 to 9000 psi, with 3000 to 4000 psi
being common for reinforced structures,
and 5000 to 6000 psi for pre-stressed
concrete members.

10
CHAPTER 1a. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 20

Concrete in Compression
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Concrete Compressive Strength


– Concrete strength varies with time, and the
specified concrete strength is usually that
strength that occurs 28 days after the
placing of concrete.
– A typical strength-time curve for normal
stone concrete is shown in Fig. 7.
– Generally, concrete attains approximately
70% of its 28-day strength in 7 days, and
approximately 85% to 90% in 14 days.

CHAPTER 1a. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 21

Concrete in Compression
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Concrete Compressive Strength


f c'
Figure 7
Compressive Strength (psi)

5000

4000
5 years
6 months
3000
28 days
2000

1000

Time

11
CHAPTER 1a. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 22

Concrete in Compression
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Modulus of Elasticity
– In review of Fig. 8a, the initial slope of the
curve varies, unlike that of steel (Fig 8b),
and only approximates a straight line.
– For steel, where stresses are below the
yield point and the material behaves
elastically, the stress-strain plot will be a
straight line.
– The slope of the straight line for steel is the
modulus of elasticity.

CHAPTER 1a. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 23

Concrete in Compression
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Modulus of Elasticity

Elastic
region
Stress

Fy

εy Strain (in/in)

(a) Concrete (b) Steel


Figure 8

12
CHAPTER 1a. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 24

Concrete in Compression
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Modulus of Elasticity
– For concrete, however, the straight-line
portion of the curve is very short, if it exists
at all.
– Therefore, there exists no constant value
of the modulus of elasticity for a given
concrete since the stress-strain ratio is not
constant.
– Even, if a straight line is assumed, the
modulus of elasticity would be different for
concrete of different strengths.

CHAPTER 1a. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 25

Concrete in Compression
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Modulus of Elasticity

At low and moderate stresses, up


'
to about 0.5 f c , concrete is
commonly assumed to behave
elastically.

13
CHAPTER 1a. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 26

Concrete in Compression
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Empirical Expressions for the Modulus of


Elasticity (by ACI Code)
For a unit weight wc of concrete between 90
and 155 lb/ft3:

Ec = wc1.5 33 f c′ (1)
where
Ec = modulus of elasticity of concrete in compression (psi)
wc = unit weight of concrete (lb/ft3)
f c' = compressive strength of concrete (psi)

CHAPTER 1a. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 27

Concrete in Compression
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Empirical Expressions for the Modulus of


Elasticity (by ACI Code)
For a unit weight wc taken as 144 lb/ft3:

Ec = 57,000 f c′ (2)

where
Ec = modulus of elasticity of concrete in compression (psi)
wc = unit weight of concrete (lb/ft3)
f c' = compressive strength of concrete (psi)

14
CHAPTER 1a. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 28

Concrete in Compression
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1
What the modulus of elasticity Ec for
concrete having a unit weight of 150 pcf
and a compressive strength of 5 ksi?

Using Eq. 1,

Ec = wc1.5 33 f c′
= (150)1.5 (33) 5000 = 4,286,826 psi

CHAPTER 1a. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 29

Concrete in Compression
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Creep
– Concrete under load, exhibits a
phenomenon called creep.
– This a property by which concrete
continues to deform over long periods of
time while under a constant load.
– Creep occurs at a decreasing rate over a
period of time and may cease after several
years.
– Higher strength concrete exhibits less
creep.

15
Reinforced Concrete Design Fifth Edition
CHAPTER
MATERIALS AND
MECHANICS OF BENDING
• A. J. Clark School of Engineering •Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering

Part I – Concrete Design and Analysis

By

1b
FALL 2002 Dr . Ibrahim. Assakkaf

ENCE 355 - Introduction to Structural Design


Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering
University of Maryland, College Park

CHAPTER 1b. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 1

Concrete in Tension
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Concrete tensile stresses occur as a


result of shear, torsion, and other
actions, and in most cases member
behavior changes upon cracking.
Q It is therefore important to be able to
predict, with reasonable accuracy, the
tensile strength of concrete.
Q The tensile and compressive strengths
of concrete are not proportional, and an
increase in compressive strength is
accompanied by smaller percentage
increase in tensile strength.

1
CHAPTER 1b. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 2

Concrete in Tension
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q The tensile strength of normal-weight


concrete in flexure is about 10% to 15%
of the compressive strength.
Q There are considerable experimental
difficulties in determining the true tensile
strength of concrete.
Q The true tensile strength of concrete is
difficult to determine.

CHAPTER 1b. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 3

Concrete in Tension
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q One common approach is to use the


modulus of rupture fr.
Q The modulus of rupture is the maximum
tensile bending stress in a plain
concrete test beam at failure.

Neutral Axis

Max. Tensile
Stress

2
CHAPTER 1b. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 4

Concrete in Tension
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q ACI Code Recommendation


For normal-weight concrete, the ACI Code
recommends that the modulus of rupture fr
be taken as

f r = 7.5 f c′ (1)

where fr in psi.

CHAPTER 1b. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 5

Concrete in Tension
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Cracking Moment, Mcr


– The moment that produces a tensile stress
just equal to the modulus of rupture is
called cracking moment Mcr.
Q The Split-Cylinder Test
– The split-cylinder test has also been used
to determine the tensile strength of
lightweight aggregate concrete.
– It has been accepted as a good measure
of the true tensile strength.

3
CHAPTER 1b. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 6

Concrete in Tension
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q The Split-Cylinder Test (cont’d)


– This test uses a standard 6-in.-diameter,
12 in.-long cylinder placed on its in a
testing machine (see Fig. 1).
– A compressive line load is applied
uniformly along the length of the cylinder.
– The compressive load produces a
transverse tensile stress, and the cylinder
will split in half along the diameter when it
tensile strength is reached.

CHAPTER 1b. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 7

Concrete in Tension
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Schematic for Split-


Cylinder Test

Figure 1

4
CHAPTER 1b. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 8

Concrete in Tension
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Splitting Tensile Strength, fct


The tensile splitting stress can be
calculated from the following formula:

2P
f ct = (2)
πLD
where
fcr = splitting tensile strength of concrete (psi)
P = applied load at splitting (lb)
L = length of cylinder (in.)
D = diameter of cylinder (in.)

CHAPTER 1b. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 9

Reinforcing Steel
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Steel is a high-cost material compared


with concrete.
Q It follows that the two materials are best
used in combination if the concrete is
made to resist the compressive stresses
and the steel the tensile stresses.
Q Concrete cannot withstand very much
tensile stress without cracking.

5
CHAPTER 1b. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 10

Reinforcing Steel
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Reinforced Concrete Beam


Figure 2

b b

Compression. x · 1
x σ


2
d N.A.
Tension
d-x
Fy

n As
(a) (b) (c)

CHAPTER 1b. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 11

Reinforcing Steel
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q It follows that tensile reinforcement must


be embedded in the concrete to
overcome the deficiency.
Q Forms of Steel Reinforcement
– Steel Reinforcing Bars
– Welded wire fabric composed of steel wire.
– Structural Steel Shapes
– Steel Pipes.

6
CHAPTER 1b. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 12

Reinforcing Steel
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

CHAPTER 1b. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 13

Reinforcing Steel
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Reinforcing Bars (rebars)


– The specifications for steel reinforcement
published by the American Society for
Testing and Materials (ASTM) are
generally accepted for steel used in
reinforced concrete construction in the
United States and are identified in the ACI
Code.

7
CHAPTER 1b. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 14

Reinforcing Steel
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Reinforcing Bars (rebars)


– These bars are readily available in straight
length of 60 ft.
– The bars vary in designation from

No. 3 through No. 11


– With additional bars:

No. 14 and No. 18

CHAPTER 1b. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 15

Reinforcing Steel
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Table 1. ASTM Standard - English Reinforcing Bars


Diameter Area Weight
Bar Designation
in in2 lb/ft
#3 [#10] 0.375 0.11 0.376
#4 [#13] 0.500 0.20 0.668
#5 [#16] 0.625 0.31 1.043
#6 [#19] 0.750 0.44 1.502
#7 [#22] 0.875 0.60 2.044
#8 [#25] 1.000 0.79 2.670
#9 [#29] 1.128 1.00 3.400
#10 [#32] 1.270 1.27 4.303
#11 [#36] 1.410 1.56 5.313
#14 [#43] 1.693 2.25 7.650
#18 [#57] 2.257 4.00 13.60
Note: Metric designations are in brackets

8
CHAPTER 1b. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 16

Reinforcing Steel
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Table 2. ASTM Standard - Metric Reinforcing Bars


Diameter Area Mass
Bar Designation
mm mm2 kg/m

#10 [#3] 9.5 71 0.560


#13 [#4] 12.7 129 0.994
#16 [#5] 15.9 199 1.552
#19 [#6] 19.1 284 2.235
#22 [#7] 22.2 387 3.042
#25 [#8] 25.4 510 3.973
#29 [#9] 28.7 645 5.060
#32 [#10] 32.3 819 6.404
#36 [#11] 35.8 1006 7.907
#43 [#14] 43.0 1452 11.38
#57 [#18] 57.3 2581 20.24
Note: English designations are in brackets

CHAPTER 1b. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 17

Reinforcing Steel
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Yield Stress for Steel


– Probably the most useful property of
reinforced concrete design calculations is
the yield stress for steel, fy.
– A typical stress-strain diagram for
reinforcing steel is shown in Fig. 3a.
– An idealized stress-strain diagram for
reinforcing steel is shown in Fig. 3b.

9
CHAPTER 1b. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 18

Reinforcing Steel
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Figure 3

Elastic Elastic
region region
Stress

Stress
Fy Fy

εy Strain εy Strain
(a) As Determined by Tensile Test (b) Idealized

CHAPTER 1b. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 19

Reinforcing Steel
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Modulus of Elasticity for Steel


– The modulus of elasticity for reinforcing
steel varies over small range, and has
been adopted by the ACI Code as

E = 29,000,000 psi = 29,000 ksi

10
CHAPTER 1b. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 20
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Beams: Mechanics of Bending


Review
Q Introduction
– The most common type of structural
member is a beam.
– In actual structures beams can be found in
an infinite variety of
• Sizes
• Shapes, and
• Orientations

CHAPTER 1b. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 21


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Beams: Mechanics of Bending


Review
Q Introduction
Definition
A beam may be defined as a member whose
length is relatively large in comparison with
its thickness and depth, and which is loaded
with transverse loads that produce significant
bending effects as oppose to twisting or axial
effects

11
CHAPTER 1b. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 22
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Beams: Mechanics of Bending


Review

Pure Bending: Prismatic members


subjected to equal and opposite couples
acting in the same longitudinal plane

CHAPTER 1b. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 23


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Beams: Mechanics of Bending


Review
Q Flexural Normal Stress

For flexural loading and linearly


elastic action, the neutral axis passes
through the centroid of the cross section
of the beam

12
CHAPTER 1b. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 24
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Beams: Mechanics of Bending


Review
Q The elastic flexural formula for normal
stress is given by
Mc
fb = (3)
I
where
fb = calculated bending stress at outer fiber of the cross section
M = the applied moment
c = distance from the neutral axis to the outside tension or
compression fiber of the beam
I = moment of inertia of the cross section about neutral axis

CHAPTER 1b. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 25


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Beams: Mechanics of Bending


Review
Q By rearranging the flexure formula, the
maximum moment that may be applied
to the beam cross section, called the
resisting moment, MR, is given by
Fb I
MR = (4)
c
Where Fb = the allowable bending stress

13
CHAPTER 1b. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 26
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Beams: Mechanics of Bending


Review
Q Example 1
Determine the maximum flexural stress
produced by a resisting moment M of
+5000 ft-lb if the beam has the cross
section shown in the figure.
2′′

6′′

2′′
6′′

CHAPTER 1b. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 27


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Beams: Mechanics of Bending


Review
Q Example 1 (cont’d)
First, we need to locate the neutral axis
from the bottom edge:
y
2′′
x yC =
(1)(2 × 6) + (2 + 3)(2 × 6) = 72 = 3′′
2× 6 + 2× 6 24
5′′ y ten = 3′′ ycom = 6 + 2 − 3 = 5′′ = ymax = c
C
· 3′′ Max. Stress = f b =
Mc
2′′ I
6′′

14
CHAPTER 1b. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 28
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Beams: Mechanics of Bending


Review
Q Example 1 (cont’d)
Find the moment of inertia I with respect to
the x axis using parallel axis-theorem:
y
6(2) 2(6)
3 3
2′′ I= + (6 × 2)(2 ) +
2
+ (2 × 6)(3 − 1)
2

x 12 12
= 4 + 48 + 36 + 48 = 136 in 4
5′′
C
(5 ×12)(5)
· 3′′
Max. Stress (com) =
136
= 2.21 ksi
2′′
6′′

CHAPTER 1b. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 29


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Beams: Mechanics of Bending


Review
Q Internal Couple Method (cont’d)
– The procedure of the flexure formula is
easy and straightforward for a beam of
known cross section for which the moment
of inertia I can be found.
– However, for a reinforced concrete beam,
the use of the flexure formula can be
somewhat complicated.
– The beam in this case is not homogeneous
and concrete does not behave elastically.

15
CHAPTER 1b. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 30
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Beams: Mechanics of Bending


Review
Q Internal Couple Method (cont’d)
– In this method, the couple represents an
internal resisting moment and is composed
of a compressive force C and a parallel
internal tensile force T as shown in Fig. 4.
– These two parallel forces C and T are
separated by a distance Z, called the the
moment arm. (Fig. 4)
– Because that all forces are in equilibrium,
therefore, C must equal T.

CHAPTER 1b. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 31


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Beams: Mechanics of Bending


Review
Q Internal Couple Method (cont’d)
y P
Centroidal axis
w
Neutral axis

C c
Z c yC c
x
y
T dA dy

Figure 4

16
CHAPTER 1b. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 32
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Beams: Mechanics of Bending


Review
Q Internal Couple Method (cont’d)
– The internal couple method of determining
beam stresses is more general than the
flexure formula because it can be applied
to homogeneous or non-homogeneous
beams having linear or nonlinear stress
distributions.
– For reinforced concrete beam, it has the
advantage of using the basic resistance
pattern that is found in a beam.

CHAPTER 1b. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 33


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Beams: Mechanics of Bending


Review
Q Example 2
Repeat Example 1 using the internal
couple method.
y
2′′
x C
5′′
C Z
· 3′′
N.A
T
2′′
6′′

17
CHAPTER 1b. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 34
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Beams: Mechanics of Bending


Review
Q Example 2 (cont’d)
– Because of the irregular area for the
tension zone, the tensile force T will be
broken up into components T1, T2, and T3.
– Likewise, the moment arm distance Z will
be broken up into components Z1, Z2, and
Z3, and calculated for each component
tensile force to the compressive force C as
shown in Fig. 5.

CHAPTER 1b. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 35


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Beams: Mechanics of Bending


Review
Q Example 2 (cont’d)
2′′ ftop

5′′ Z1 Z2
C Z3
·
T1
3′′
2′′ T3
T2

6′′ fbott
fmid
Figure 5

18
CHAPTER 1b. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 36

2′′
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf
ftop
Example 2
(cont’d) C

5′′ Z1 Z2
C Z3
·
1′′ T1
3′′
2′′ T3
T2

6′′ fbott
fmid
1
C = f avg × area = f top [(5)(2)] = 5 f top From similar triangles:
2
1 1 f mid 1
T1 = f avg × area = f mid [(1)(2)] = f mid = f bott =
2 3 f bott 3
T2 = f avg × area = f mid [(2 )(6 )] = 12 f mid = 4 f bott
1
 f − f mid  ∴ f mid = f bott
T3 = f avg × area =  bott [(2)(6 )] = 6 f bott − 6 f mid 3
 2 

CHAPTER 1b. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 37

2′′
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf
ftop
Example 2
(cont’d) C

5′′ Z1 Z2
C Z3
·
1′′ T1
3′′
2′′ T3
T2

6′′ fbott
fmid
C = T = T1 + T2 + T3

5 f top =
1
f bott + 4 f bott + 6 f bott − 6 f mid 5
3 f top = f bott
1 25
3
5 f top = f bott + 4 f bott + 6 f bott − 2 f bott = f bott
3 3

19
CHAPTER 1b. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 38

2′′
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf
ftop
Example 2
(cont’d) C

5′′ Z1 Z2
C Z3
·
1′′ T1
3′′
2′′ T3
T2

6′′ fbott
fmid
2 2
Z1 = (5) + (1) = 4 in.
3 3 M ext = M R
5000(12 ) = Z1T1 + Z 2T2 + Z 3T3
2 16
Z 2 = (5) + 2 = in.
3 3
2 2 17 60,000 = Z1T1 + Z 2T2 + Z 3T3
Z 3 = (5) + 1 + (2) = in.
3 3 3

CHAPTER 1b. MATERIALS AND MECHANICS OF BENDING Slide No. 39

2 ′′
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf
ftop
Example 2
(cont’d) C
5′′ Z1 Z2
C Z3
· 1′′ T1
3′′
2 ′′ T3
T
6 ′′ fbott
fmid
2

1  16 17 136
60,000 = 4 f bott  + (4 f bott ) + (4 f bott ) = f bott
3  3 3 3
Therefore,
f bott = 1,323.53 psi (Tension)
The maximum Stress is compressive stress :
5 5
f max = f top = f bott = (1,323.53) = 2,205.88 psi = 2.21 ksi (Com)
3 3

20
Reinforced Concrete Design Fifth Edition
CHAPTER
RECTANGULAR R/C
CONCRETE BEAMS:
TENSION STEEL ONLY
• A. J. Clark School of Engineering •Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering

Part I – Concrete Design and Analysis

By

2a
FALL 2002 Dr . Ibrahim. Assakkaf

ENCE 355 - Introduction to Structural Design


Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering
University of Maryland, College Park

CHAPTER 2a. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 1

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Bending moment produces bending


strains on a beam, and consequently
compressive and tensile stresses.
Q Under positive moment (as normally the
case), compressive stresses are
produced in the top of the beam and
tensile stresses are produced in the
bottom.
Q Bending members must resist both
compressive and tensile stresses.

1
CHAPTER 2a. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 2

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Stresses in Beam
y P b a w
Figure 1
x
b a
y P
h

MR τ
dA σ
∆x
x
+y
O
V
R

CHAPTER 2a. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 3

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Sign Convention Figure 2

V V
M M (b) Positive Shear (clockwise)

L.H.F R.H.F M M
V V
(a) Positive Shear & Moment
(c) Positive Moment
(concave upward)

2
CHAPTER 2a. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 4

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Concrete Flexural Members


– Types:
• Beam
• Wall
• Slab
• Etc.
– These concrete members must resist both
tensile and compressive stresses.
– Because concrete is weak in tension,
embedded steel bars are placed in the
tension zone.

CHAPTER 2a. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 5

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Figure 3

MR

4 in. 12 in.

4 in. 5 in.
6 in.
6 in.
5 in. 6 in.
6 in.

3
CHAPTER 2a. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 6

Methods of Analysis and Design


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Elastic Design
– Elastic design is considered valid for the
homogeneous plain concrete beam as long
as the tensile stress does not exceed the
modulus of rupture fr.
– Elastic design can also be applied to a
reinforced concrete beam using the
working stress design (WSD) approach.

CHAPTER 2a. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 7

Methods of Analysis and Design


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q WSD Assumptions
1. A plain section before bending remains
plane after bending.
2. Stress is proportional to strain (Hooke’s
Law).
3. Tensile stress for concrete is considered
zero and reinforcing steel carries all the
tension.
4. The bond between the concrete and steel
is perfect, so no slip occurs.

4
CHAPTER 2a. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 8

Methods of Analysis and Design


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Strength Design Method


– This method is the modern approach for
the analysis and design of reinforced
concrete.
– The assumption are similar to those
outlined for the WSD with one exception:
• Compressive concrete stress is approximately
proportional to strain up to moderate loads. As
the load increases, the approximate
proportionality ceases to exit, and the stress
diagram takes a shape similar to the concrete
stress-strain curve of the following figure.

CHAPTER 2a. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 9

Methods of Analysis and Design


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Concrete Compressive Strength


Figure 1

5
CHAPTER 2a. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 10

Methods of Analysis and Design


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Comparison between the Two Methods


WSD or ASD USD
Q Working (service) loads are QService loads are amplified
used and a member is designed using partial safety factors.
based on an allowable QA member is design so that its
compressive bending stress, strength is reduced by a
normally 0.45 f c′ reduction safety factor.
QCompressive stress pattern is QThe strength at failure is
assumed to vary linearly from commonly called the ultimate
zero at the neutral axis. strength
QFormula: QFormula:
m
Rn m
≥ ∑ Li φRn ≥ ∑γ i Li
FS i =1 i =1
ASD LRFD

CHAPTER 2a. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 11

Behavior Under Load


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

(1) At very small loads:


Stresses Elastic and
Section Uncracked Reinforced Concrete Beam

b ε c (comp.) f c (comp.)

d N.A.
h
ε s (tens.) f s (tens.)

ε c (tens.) f c (tens.)
Stresses are below modulus of rupture.

6
CHAPTER 2a. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 12

Behavior Under Load


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1
A rectangular beam, as shown
in Fig. 1, has the dimensions b b
= 10 in.,h = 25 in., and d = 23
in., and is reinforced with three
No. 8 bars. The concrete
cylinder strength f c′ is 4000 psi,
and the tensile strength in h d
3 No. 8 bars
bending (modulus of rupture) is
475 psi. The yield point of the
steel fy is 60,000 psi.
Determine the stresses caused
by a bending moment M = 45
ft-kips. Assume the unit weight
for concrete is 144 lb/ft3.

CHAPTER 2a. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 13

Behavior Under Load


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1 (cont’d)
Area for No. 8 bar = 0.79 in 2 (see Table 1)
10 in
Therefore, As = 3(0.79 ) = 2.37 in 2

The modulus of elasticity for


Concrete can be calculated from
25 in 23 in
Ec = w1c .5 33 f c′ 3 No. 8 bars

= (144 ) (33) 4,000 = 3,606,514 psi


1.5

Therefore,
Es 29,000,000
n= = = 8.04 ≈ 8
Ec 3,606,514

7
CHAPTER 2a. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 14

Behavior Under Load


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Table 1. ASTM Standard - English Reinforcing Bars


Diameter Area Weight
Bar Designation
in in2 lb/ft
#3 [#10] 0.375 0.11 0.376
#4 [#13] 0.500 0.20 0.668
#5 [#16] 0.625 0.31 1.043
#6 [#19] 0.750 0.44 1.502
#7 [#22] 0.875 0.60 2.044
#8 [#25] 1.000 0.79 2.670
#9 [#29] 1.128 1.00 3.400
#10 [#32] 1.270 1.27 4.303
#11 [#36] 1.410 1.56 5.313
#14 [#43] 1.693 2.25 7.650
#18 [#57] 2.257 4.00 13.60
Note: Metric designations are in brackets

CHAPTER 2a. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 15

Behavior Under Load


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1 (cont’d)
– Transformed Section

10 in 10 in

25 in 23 in 25 in 23 in
3 No. 8 bars

n As (n –1) As
Ac – As = n As – As = (n – 1) As = (8-1) (2.37) = 16.59 in2

8
CHAPTER 2a. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 16

Behavior Under Load


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1 (cont’d)
– Neutral axis location & moment of inertia
(25)(10) 25 + 16.59(23) 10 in
y= 2 = 13.15 in
(25)(10) + 16.59
10(13.15) 10(25 − 13.15)
3 3
y
+ 16.59(25 − 13.15 − 2)
2
I= + 23 in
3 3
25 in N.A
= 14,736.1 in 4

– Stresses
Mc (45 ×12 ×1000 )(13.15)
fc = = = 481.9 psi
I 14,736.1 (n –1) As
Mc (45 ×12 ×1000)(25 − 13.15)
f ct = = = 434.2 psi < 475 psi OK
I 14,736.1

fs = n
Mc
=8
(45 ×12 ×1000)(25 − 13.15 − 2) = 2,887.6 psi
I 14,736.1

CHAPTER 2a. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 17

Behavior Under Load


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

(2) At moderate loads:


Stresses Elastic and
Section Cracked Reinforced Concrete Beam

b ε c (comp.) f c (comp.)

d N.A.
h
ε s (tens.) f s (tens.)

• Tensile stresses of concrete will be exceeded.


• Concrete will crack (hairline crack), and steel bars will resist tensile stresses.
• This will occur at approximately 0.5 f c′ .

9
CHAPTER 2a. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 18

Behavior Under Load


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Reinforced Concrete Beam Formula


The neutral axis for a concrete beam is
found by solving the quadratic equation:
1 2
bx + nAs x − nAs d = 0 (1)
2
b b

x · 1
x
2
·
C
d
d-x

n As

CHAPTER 2a. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 19

Behavior Under Load


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 2
A concrete floor slab is reinforced by
diameter steel rods placed 1 in. above the
lower face of the slab and spaced 6 in. on
centers. The modulus of elasticity is 3×106
psi for concrete used and 30 ×106 psi for
steel. Knowing that a bending moment of
35 kip⋅in is applied to each 1-ft width of the
slab, determine (a) the maximum stress in
concrete and (b) the stress in the steel.

10
CHAPTER 2a. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 20

Behavior Under Load


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 2 (cont’d)
M = 35 kip ⋅ in

4 in. 12 in.

4 in. 5 in.
6 in.
6 in.
5 in. 6 in.
6 in.

CHAPTER 2a. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 21

Behavior Under Load


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

12 in.

Q Example 2 (cont’d) 4 in. 5 in.

– Transformed Section
• Consider a portion of the slab 12 in. wide, in
5
which there are two 8 - in diameter rods having a
total cross-sectional area

12 in.   5 2 
π   
As = 2   8   = 0.614 in 2
x N.A.
4 in. ·C 4
Es 30 × 106
4-x n= = = 10
Ec 3 × 106
nAs = 10(0.614 ) = 6.14 in 2

11
CHAPTER 2a. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 22

Behavior Under Load


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 2 (cont’d)
– Neutral Axis
• The neutral axis of the slab passes through
the centroid of the transformed section. Using
Quadratic Eq. 1:
Formula
1 2
− b ± b 2 − 4ac
bx + nAs x − nAs d = 0
x= 2
2a
1 x = 1.575 in
(12)x 2 + 6.14 x − 6.14(4) = 0
2
x1 = 1.575 take
6 x 2 + 6.14 x − 24.56 = 0
x2 = −2.599

CHAPTER 2a. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 23

Behavior Under Load


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 2 (cont’d)
– Moment of Inertia
• The centroidal moment of inertia of the
transformed section is
12 in.

1.575 N.A.
4 in. ·C I=
12(1.575)
3
3
+ 6.14(2.425) = 51.7 in 4
2

2.425

6.14 in2

12
CHAPTER 2a. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 24

Behavior Under Load


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 2 (cont’d)
Maximum stress in concrete:
My 35(1.575)
σc = − =− = −1.066 ksi (C)
I 51.7

Stress in steel:

My 35(− 2.425)
σ s = −n = −(10) = +16.42 ksi (T)
I 51.7

CHAPTER 2a. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 25

Behavior Under Load


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

(3) With further load increase:


Flexural Strength
ACI Approach Reinforced Concrete Beam

f c (comp.)
b ε c (comp.)

d N.A.
h
ε s (tens.) f s (tens.)

• Stress curve above N.A. will be similar to the stress-strain curve of Fig. 1.
• Concrete has cracked, and the process is irreversible.
• Steel bar has yielded and will not return to its original length.

13
CHAPTER 2a. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 26

Behavior Under Load


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Concrete Compressive Strength


Figure 1

CHAPTER 2a. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 27

Strength Design Method


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Assumptions
Q Strength Design
– If the distribution of concrete compression
stresses at or near ultimate load (Fig. 2),
had a well- defined and invariable shape-
parabolic – it would be possible to derive a
completely rational theory of ultimate
bending stress.
– This theory has been well established and
incorporated in the ACI Manual.
– The basic assumptions follows.

14
CHAPTER 2a. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 28

Strength Design Method


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Assumptions
Flexural Strength
ACI Approach Reinforced Concrete Beam

f c (comp.)
b ε c (comp.)

d N.A.
h
ε s (tens.) f s (tens.)

Figure 2

CHAPTER 2a. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 29

Strength Design Method


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Assumptions
Q Basic Assumption:
1. A plane section before bending remains
plane after bending.
2. Stresses and strain are approximately
proportional up to moderate loads
(concrete stress ≤ 0.5 f c′ ). When the
load is increased, the variation in the
concrete stress is no longer linear.
3. Tensile strength of concrete is neglected
in the design of reinforced concrete
beams.

15
CHAPTER 2a. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 30

Strength Design Method


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Assumptions
Q Basic Assumption (cont’d):
4. The maximum usable concrete
compressive strain at the extreme fiber is
assumed equal to 0.003 (Fig. 3)
5. The steel is assumed to be uniformly
strained to the strain that exists at the
level of the centroid of the steel. Also if
the strain in the steel εs is less than the
yield strain of the steel εy, the stress in
the steel is Es εs. If εs ≥ εy, the stress in
steel will be equal to fy (Fig. 4)

CHAPTER 2a. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 31

Strength Design Method


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Assumptions
Q Basic Assumption (cont’d):
6. The bond between the steel and concrete
is perfect and no lip occurs.
0.003 Elastic
region Figure 4
Figure 3
Stress

fy

εy Strain
εy Strain Idealized Stress-Strain Curve

16
Reinforced Concrete Design Fifth Edition
CHAPTER
RECTANGULAR R/C
CONCRETE BEAMS:
TENSION STEEL ONLY
• A. J. Clark School of Engineering •Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering

Part I – Concrete Design and Analysis

By

2b
FALL 2002 Dr . Ibrahim. Assakkaf

ENCE 355 - Introduction to Structural Design


Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering
University of Maryland, College Park

CHAPTER 2b. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 1
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Flexural Strength of Rectangular


Beams
Q Ultimate Moment (Strength)
– The ultimate moment for a reinforced
concrete beam can be defined as the
moment that exists just prior to the failure
of the beam.
– In order to evaluate this moment, we have
to examine the strains, stresses, and
forces that exist in the beam.
– The beam of Fig. 1 has a width of b, an
effective depth d, and is reinforced with a
steel area As.

1
CHAPTER 2b. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 2
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Flexural Strength of Rectangular


Beams
Q Ultimate Strength
Flexural Strength Reinforced Concrete Beam
ACI Approach ε c (0.003 as a limit )
b f c′
NC
N.A.
h d
NT
εs ≥ ε y f s = f y as a limit
Figure 1
Strain Stress Force

CHAPTER 2b. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 3
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Flexural Strength of Rectangular


Beams
Q Possible Values for Concrete Strains
due to Loading (Modes of Failure)
1. Concrete compressive strain is less than
0.003 in./in. when the maximum tensile
steel unit equal its yield stress fy as a
limit.
2. Maximum compressive concrete strain
equals 0.003 in./in. and the tensile steel
unit stress is less than its yield stress fy.

2
CHAPTER 2b. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 4
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Flexural Strength of Rectangular


Beams
Q Notes on Concrete Compressive Stresses
– The ultimate compressive stress for
concrete does not occur at the outer fiber.
– The shape of the curve is not the same for
different-strength concretes.
– The shape of the curve will also depend on
the size and dimensions of the beam.
– The ultimate compressive stress of concrete
develops at some intermediate level near,
but not at, the extreme outer fiber.

CHAPTER 2b. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 5
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Flexural Strength of Rectangular


Beams
Q Nominal Moment Strength
– The forces NC and NT, and the distance Z
separated them constitute an internal
resisting couple whose maximum value is
termed nominal moment strength of the
bending member.
– As a limit, this nominal strength must be
capable of resisting the actual design
bending moment induced by the applied
loads.

3
CHAPTER 2b. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 6
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Flexural Strength of Rectangular


Beams
Q Nominal Moment Strength (cont’d)
– The determination of the moment strength
is complex because of
• The shape of the compressive stress diagram
f c′
above the neutral axis
• Not only is NC difficult to evaluate but also its
location relative to the tensile steel is difficult to
establish

f s = f y as a limit
Stress

CHAPTER 2b. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 7
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Flexural Strength of Rectangular


Beams
Q How to Determine the Moment
Strength of Reinforced Concrete
Beam?
– To determine the moment capacity, it is
necessary only to know
1. The total resultant compressive force NC
in the concrete, and
2. Its location from the outer compressive
fiber, from which the distance Z may be
established.

4
CHAPTER 2b. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 8
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Flexural Strength of Rectangular


Beams
Q How to Determine the Moment Strength
of Reinforced Concrete Beam? (cont’d)
– These two values may easily be
established by replacing the unknown
complex compressive stress distribution by
a fictitious (equivalent) one of simple
geometrical shape (e.g., rectangle).
– Provided that the fictitious distribution
results in the same total NC applied at the
same location as in the actual distribution
when it is at the point of failure.

CHAPTER 2b. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 9
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Flexural Strength of Rectangular


Beams
Q Mathematical Motivation
– Consider the function
f (x ) = y = 2 x (1)
– Plot of this function is shown in Fig. 2 for x
ranges from 0 to 4, and y from 0 to 4.
– The area under the curve will be
determined analytically.
– Note that in real situation this area will be
the equivalent,for example, to compressive
force NC for concrete per unit length.

5
CHAPTER 2b. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 10
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Flexural Strength of Rectangular


Beams
Q Mathematical Motivation (cont’d)

Area under the Curve NC per unit length

y fc

4 in Area 4 in
x x′ x x′
x c
4 in 4 in
A NC

CHAPTER 2b. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 11
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Flexural Strength of Rectangular


Beams
Q Mathematical
Motivation (cont’d) y
( )
4 4 4 1
A = ∫ ydx = ∫ 2 x dx = 2 ∫ x dx = 10.7 in 2 2

0 0 0
~ ~
x=
∫ x dA =
∫ x dA
∫ dA 10.7 4 in y x′
4

∫ x dA = ∫ x( ydx )
~ x
4 in
0

( )
4 4 3 dx
= ∫ x 2 x dx =2∫ x 2 dx =25.6 A
0 0
25.6
Therefore, x = = 2.4 in.
10.7

6
CHAPTER 2b. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 12
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Flexural Strength of Rectangular


Beams y
Actual Curve
Q Mathematical
Motivation (cont’d)
4 in Area = 10.7
– Objective
x x′
• Our objective is to
find a fictitious or x
4 in
equivalent curve y A
results in the same
Equivalent Simple Curve
total area A applied at
the same location as
the actual curve. Area = 10.7
4 in
• Find x’ and y’ y′
x′ x′
x
4 in
A

CHAPTER 2b. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 13
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Flexural Strength of Rectangular


Beams y
Actual Curve
Q Mathematical
Motivation (cont’d)
4 in Area = 10.7
– Calculations of x′and y′
x x′
x′ = 4 − x = 4 − 2.4 = 1.6 in. x
4 in
Area = 2 x′y′ y A
Area 10.7 Equivalent Simple Curve
y′ = = = 3.34 in.
2 x′ 2(1.6)

4 in Area = 10.7
y′
x′ x′
x
4 in
A

7
CHAPTER 2b. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 14
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Flexural Strength of Rectangular


Beams f
Actual Stress Distributionc

Q Mathematical Motivation
(cont’d) f c′ Area = 10.7
– If we are dealing with a
concrete compressive x x′
c
stress distribution and we c
let x′ = a / 2 ,then y NC per unit length
y′ = 0.84 f c′ Equivalent Stress Distribution
a
and
a = 2 x′ = β1c = 2(1.6) = 3.2 in. f c′ Area = 10.7
a a y′
Then, 2 2
3.2 c
β1 = = 0.80 c
4 NC per unit length

CHAPTER 2b. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 15

Equivalent Stress Distribution


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q As we saw in our previous mathematical


example, any complicated function can
be replaced with an equivalent or
fictitious one to make the calculations
simple and will give the same results.
Q For purposes of simplification and
practical application, a fictitious but
equivalent rectangular concrete stress
distribution was proposed.

8
CHAPTER 2b. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 16

Equivalent Stress Distribution


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q This rectangular stress distribution was


proposed by Whiney (1942) and
subsequently adopted by the ACI Code
Q The ACI code also stipulates that other
compressive stress distribution shapes
may be used provided that they are in
agreement with test results.
Q Because of its simplicity, however, the
rectangular shape has become the
more widely stress distribution (Fig. 2).

CHAPTER 2b. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 17

Equivalent Stress Distribution


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Whitney’s Rectangular Stress Distribution


f c′ 0.85 f c′
a
Figure 2

2
a N C = 0.85 f c′ab
N.A
d
a
Z =d−
2
fy fy
N C = As f y
Rectangular
Actual Compressive Equivalent Compressive Internal Couple
Stress Block Stress Block

9
CHAPTER 2b. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 18

Equivalent Stress Distribution


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Whitney’s Rectangular Stress


Distribution
– According to Fig. 2, the average stress
distribution is taken as
Average Stress = 0.85 f c′

– It is assumed to act over the upper area on


the beam cross section defined by the
width b and a depth a as shown in Fig. 3.

CHAPTER 2b. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 19

Equivalent Stress Distribution


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Whitney’s Rectangular Stress


Distribution
0.85 f c′
Figure 3
b
a
c a 2

N C = 0.85 f c′ab
N .A.
Z

As NT = As f y

10
CHAPTER 2b. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 20

Equivalent Stress Distribution


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Whitney’s Rectangular Stress


Distribution
– The magnitude of a may determined by

a = β1c (2)
Where
C = distance from the outer fiber to the neutral axis
β1 = a factor dependent on concrete strength, and is given by
0.85 for f c′ ≤ 4,000 psi

β1 = 1.05 − 5 ×10- 5 f c′ for 4,000 psi < f c′ ≤ 8,000 psi (3)
0.65 for f c′ > 8,000 psi

CHAPTER 2b. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 21

Equivalent Stress Distribution


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1
Determine the nominal
moment Mn for a beam 10 in.
of cross section shown,
where = 4,000 psi. N.A.
25 in.
Assume A615 grade 60 23 in.
steel that has a yield
strength of 60 ksi and a
modulus of elasticity =
29 × 106 psi.

11
CHAPTER 2b. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 22

Equivalent Stress Distribution


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1 (cont’d)
0.85 f c′
10′′ εc a
2
a N C = 0.85 f c′ab
c
N.A
23′′
a
Z =d−
2
3 #8 bars
N C = As f y
εs

CHAPTER 2b. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 23

Equivalent Stress Distribution


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1 (cont’d)
Area for No. 8 bar = 0.79 in 2 (see Table 1)
Therefore, As = 3(0.79 ) = 2.37 in 2 (Also see Table A-2 Text)

Assume that fy for steel exists subject later check.


10 in.
NC = N S
0.85 f c′ab = As f y N.A.
25 in.
As f y 2.37(60)
a= = = 4.18 in. 23 in.
0.85 f c′b 0.85(4 )(10)

12
CHAPTER 2b. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 24

Equivalent Stress Distribution


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Table 1. ASTM Standard - English Reinforcing Bars


Diameter Area Weight
Bar Designation
in in2 lb/ft
#3 [#10] 0.375 0.11 0.376
#4 [#13] 0.500 0.20 0.668
#5 [#16] 0.625 0.31 1.043
#6 [#19] 0.750 0.44 1.502
#7 [#22] 0.875 0.60 2.044
#8 [#25] 1.000 0.79 2.670
#9 [#29] 1.128 1.00 3.400
#10 [#32] 1.270 1.27 4.303
#11 [#36] 1.410 1.56 5.313
#14 [#43] 1.693 2.25 7.650
#18 [#57] 2.257 4.00 13.60
Note: Metric designations are in brackets

CHAPTER 2b. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 25

Equivalent Stress Distribution


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

10 in.
Q Example 1 (cont’d)
Calculation of Mn N.A.
25 in.
 a  a 23 in.
M n = N C  d −  = NT  d − 
 2  2
 a  a
M n = 0.85 f c′ab d −  = As f y  d − 
 2  2
Based on steel :
 4.18 
M n = 2.37(60) 23 −  = 2,973.4 in. - kips
 2 
2,973.4
= = 247.8 ft - kips
12

13
CHAPTER 2b. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 26

Equivalent Stress Distribution


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1 (cont’d)
Check if the steel reaches its yield point
before the concrete reaches its ultimate
strain of 0.003:
• Referring to the next figure (Fig. 4), the neutral
axis can be located as follows:
Using Eqs. 2 and 3 :
β1 = 0.85
a = β1c
Therefore,
a 4.18
c= = = 4.92 in.
β1 0.85

CHAPTER 2b. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 27

Equivalent Stress Distribution


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1 (cont’d)
Figure 4
0.85 f c′
10′′ 0.003 a
2
a N C = 0.85 f c′ab
c
N.A
23′′ d a
Z =d−
2
3 #8 bars
N C = As f y
εs

14
CHAPTER 2b. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 28

Equivalent Stress Distribution


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1 (cont’d)
By similar triangles in the strain diagram,
the strain in steel when the concrete strain
is 0.003 can be found as follows:
0.003 ε 0.003
= s
c d −c
d −c 23 − 4.92 c
ε s = 0.003 = 0.003 = 0.011 in./in.
c 4.92
The strain at which the steel yields is d = 23′′
fy 60,000
εy = = = 0.00207 in./in.
Es 29 × 106
Since εs (= 0.011) > εy (= 0.00207) OK
εs

CHAPTER 2b. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 29
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Balanced, Overreinforced, and


Underreinforced Beams
Q Strain Distribution

0.003 Elastic
region Figure 6
Figure 5
Stress

fy

εy Strain
εy Strain Idealized Stress-Strain Curve

15
CHAPTER 2b. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 30
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Balanced, Overreinforced, and


Underreinforced Beams
Q Strain Distribution
0.003

fy
εy =
E
Underreinforced N.A.
Balanced N.A.

Overreinforced N.A.
εy

CHAPTER 2b. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 31
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Balanced, Overreinforced, and


Underreinforced Beams
Q Balanced Condition:
εs = εy and εc = 0.003
Q Overreinforced Beam
εs < εy, and εc = 0.003. The beam will have more steel
than required to create the balanced condition. This is
not preferable since will cause the concrete to crush
suddenly before that steel reaches its yield point.
Q Underreinforced Beam
εs > εy, and εc = 0.003. The beam will have less steel
than required to create the balanced condition. This is
preferable and is ensured by the ACI Specifications.

16
CHAPTER 2b. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 32
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Reinforcement Ratio Limitations


and Guidelines
Q Although failure due yielding of the steel
is gradual with adequate warning of
collapse, failure due to crushing of the
concrete is sudden and without warning.
Q The first type (Underreinforced beam) is
preferred and ensured by the
specifications of the ACI.
Q The ACI code stipulates that
As ≤ 0.75 Asb (4)

CHAPTER 2b. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 33
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Reinforcement Ratio Limitations


and Guidelines
Q Steel Ratio
– The steel ratio (sometimes called
reinforcement ratio) is given by
b As
ρ= (5)
N.A.
bd
h d

ACI stipulates that


As
ρ max = 0.75 ρ b (6)
or Asmax = 0.75 Asb

17
CHAPTER 2b. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 34
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Reinforcement Ratio Limitations


and Guidelines
Q Example 2
Determine the amount of 10 in.
steel required to create a
balanced condition for the N.A.
25 in.
beam shown, where = 4,000 23 in.
psi. Assume A615 grade 60
steel that has a yield strength
of 60 ksi and a modulus of
elasticity = 29 × 106 psi. Also
check the code requirement
for ductile-type beam.

CHAPTER 2b. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 35
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Reinforcement Ratio Limitations


and Guidelines
Q Example 2 (cont’d)
Area for No. 8 bar = 0.79 in 2 (see Table 1)
Therefore, As = 3(0.79 ) = 2.37 in 2 10 in.

The strain at which the steel yields is


N.A.
fy 25 in.
60,000
εy = = = 0.00207 in./in. 23 in.
Es 29 × 106

In reference to the strain diagram of Fig. 7,


and from similar triangles,

cb d − cb
=
0.003 0.00207

18
CHAPTER 2b. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 36

Reinforcement Ratio Limitations


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

and Guidelines
Table 1. ASTM Standard - English Reinforcing Bars
Diameter Area Weight
Bar Designation
in in2 lb/ft
#3 [#10] 0.375 0.11 0.376
#4 [#13] 0.500 0.20 0.668
#5 [#16] 0.625 0.31 1.043
#6 [#19] 0.750 0.44 1.502
#7 [#22] 0.875 0.60 2.044
#8 [#25] 1.000 0.79 2.670
#9 [#29] 1.128 1.00 3.400
#10 [#32] 1.270 1.27 4.303
#11 [#36] 1.410 1.56 5.313
#14 [#43] 1.693 2.25 7.650
#18 [#57] 2.257 4.00 13.60
Note: Metric designations are in brackets

CHAPTER 2b. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 37

Reinforcement Ratio Limitations


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

and Guidelines
Q Example 2 (cont’d) Figure 7

0.85 f c′
10′′ 0.003 a
2
a N C = 0.85 f c′ab
cb
N.A
23′′
a
Z =d−
d − cb 2
3 #8 bars
N C = As f y
0.00207
Strain

19
CHAPTER 2b. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 38

Reinforcement Ratio Limitations


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

and Guidelines
Q Example 2 (cont’d)
cb 23 − cb
=
0.003 0.00207 10 in.
From which,
cb = 13.6 in. N.A.
25 in.
Using Eqs. 2 and 3 : 23 in.
β1 = 0.85 bbcause f c′ = 4,000 psi
a = β1c = 0.85(13.6) = 11.6 in.

CHAPTER 2b. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 39
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Reinforcement Ratio Limitations


and Guidelines
Q Example 2 (cont’d)
N Cb = 0.85 f c′ab b = 0.85(4 )(11.6 )(10 ) = 394.4 kips
N Cb = NTb = Asb f y
Therefore, 10 in.
N 394.4
Asb = Cb = = 6.57 in 2
fy 60 N.A.
25 in.
Hence, required steel for balanced 23 in.
condition = 6.57 in2
From Eq. 6,
Asmax = 0.75 Asb = 0.74(6.57 ) = 4.93 in 2 > As = 2.37 in 2 OK

20
CHAPTER 2b. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 40
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Reinforcement Ratio Limitations


and Guidelines
Q Steel Ratio Formula for Balanced Beam
Instead of using laborious techniques for
determining the balanced steel of beam,
the following formula can be used to
determine the steel ratio ρb at the balance
condition:
0.85 f c′β1  87,000 
ρb = (7)
fy  f + 87,000 
 y 
where
f c′ = compressive strength of concrete (psi)
fy = yield strength of steel (psi)
β1 = factor that depends on f c′ as given by Eq. 3

CHAPTER 2b. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 41
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Reinforcement Ratio Limitations


and Guidelines
Q Lower Limit for Steel Reinforcement
– The ACI Code establishes a lower limit on
the amount of tension reinforcement. The
code states that where tensile
reinforcement is required , the steel area
As shall not be less than that given by
3 f c′ 200 (8)
As , min = bw d ≥ bw d
fy fy

Note that for rectangular beam bw = b

21
CHAPTER 2b. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 42
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Reinforcement Ratio Limitations


and Guidelines (Table A-5 Text)
 3 f c′ 200  Recommended Design Values
f c′ (psi )  ≥  ρmax = 0.75 ρb
 f y f y  ρb k (ksi)
Fy = 40,000 psi
3,000 0.0050 0.0278 0.0135 0.4828
Table 1. 4,000
5,000
0.0050
0.0053
0.0372
0.0436
0.0180
0.0225
0.6438
0.8047
Design Constants 6,000 0.0058 0.0490 0.0270 0.9657
Fy = 50,000 psi
3,000 0.0040 0.0206 0.0108 0.4828
4,000 0.0040 0.0275 0.0144 0.6438
5,000 0.0042 0.0324 0.0180 0.8047
6,000 0.0046 0.0364 0.0216 0.9657
Fy = 60,000 psi
3,000 0.0033 0.0161 0.0090 0.4828
4,000 0.0033 0.0214 0.0120 0.6438
5,000 0.0035 0.0252 0.0150 0.8047
6,000 0.0039 0.0283 0.0180 0.9657
Fy = 75,000 psi
3,000 0.0027 0.0116 0.0072 0.4828
4,000 0.0027 0.0155 0.0096 0.6438
5,000 0.0028 0.0182 0.0120 0.8047
6,000 0.0031 0.0206 0.0144 0.9657

22
Reinforced Concrete Design Fifth Edition
CHAPTER
RECTANGULAR R/C
CONCRETE BEAMS:
TENSION STEEL ONLY
• A. J. Clark School of Engineering •Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering

Part I – Concrete Design and Analysis

By

2c
FALL 2002 Dr . Ibrahim. Assakkaf

ENCE 355 - Introduction to Structural Design


Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering
University of Maryland, College Park

CHAPTER 2c. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 1

Strength Requirements
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q The basic criterion for strength design


may be expressed as
Strength furnished ≥ Strength required (1)

Q All members and all sections of


members must be proportioned to meet
this criterion.
Q Eq. 1 can be thought of as a supply and
a demand.

1
CHAPTER 2c. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 2

Strength Requirements
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q The supply is considered as the


strength furnished, while the demand as
the strength required.
Q The required strength may be
expressed in the forms of design loads
or their related moments, shears, and
forces.
Q Design loads may be defined as service
loads multiplied by their appropriate
factors.

CHAPTER 2c. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 3

Strength Requirements
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Eq. 1 can be expressed in a more


compact general form as
m
φRn ≥ ∑γ i Lni (2)
i =1
Where
φ = strength reduction factor
γi = load factor for the ith load component out of n components
Rn = nominal or design strength (stress, moment, force, etc.)
Lni = nominal (or design) value for the ith load component out
of m components

2
CHAPTER 2c. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 4

Strength Requirements
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Eq. 2 is the basis for Load and


Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) for
Structural Members.
Q This equation uses different partial
safety factors for the strength and the
load effects.
Q The load factors are usually amplifying
factors (>1), while the strength factors
are called reduction factors (<1).

CHAPTER 2c. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 5

Strength Requirements
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Strength Factor
– The strength reduction factor φ provide for
the possibility that small adverse variation
in material strength, workmanship, and
dimensions may combine to result in
undercapacity.
Q Load Factors
– The load factors γ’s attempt to assess the
possibility that prescribed service loads
may be exceeded. Obviously, a live load is
more apt to be exceeded than a dead load,
which is largely fixed by the weight.

3
CHAPTER 2c. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 6

Strength Requirements
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q ACI Code Provisions


– In assigning strength reduction factors, the
degree of ductility and the importance of
the member as well as the degree of
accuracy with which the strength of the
member can be established are
considered.
– The ACI Code provides for these variables
by using the following φ factors as provided
in Table 1.

CHAPTER 2c. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 7

Strength Requirements
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Table 1. Strength Reduction Factors


Type of Loading φ
Bending 0.90
Shear and Torsion 0.85
Compression members (spirally reinforced) 0.75
Compression Members (tied) 0.70
Bearing on Concrete 0.70

4
CHAPTER 2c. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 8

Strength Requirements
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q ACI Code Provisions


– When word design is used throughout the
ACI Code, it indicates that the load factors
are included.
– The subscript u is used to indicate design
loads, moments, shears, and forces.
– For example, the design load wu = 1.4wDL + 1.7 wLL
and the required or design moment
strength for dead and live loads is
M u = 1.4M DL + 1.7 M LL
where 1.4 and 1.7 are the load factors.

CHAPTER 2c. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 9

Strength Requirements
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q ACI Requirements for Dead and Live


Loads
– For dead and live loads, the ACI Code
specifies design loads, design shears, and
design moments be obtained from service
loads by the using the relation

U = 1.4D +1.7L (3)

5
CHAPTER 2c. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 10

Strength Requirements
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q ACI Requirements for Strength


– The ACI Code stipulates that the strength
(moment, shear, force) furnished shall
meet the following requirements

φRn ≥ 1.4D +1.7L (4)


Where
φ = strength reduction factor as provided in Table 1
Rn = nominal or design strength (stress, moment, force, etc.)

CHAPTER 2c. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 11
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Rectangular Beam Analysis for


Moment
Q The analysis of a reinforced concrete
beam implies that we know precisely
what comprises the section of the
beam.
Q The following data are known:
1. Tension bar size or number (or As).
2. Beam width (b).
3. Effective depth (d) or total depth (h).
4. Compressive strength of concrete ( f c′ ).
5. Yield strength of steel (fy).

6
CHAPTER 2c. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 12
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Rectangular Beam Analysis for


Moment
Q Variables that need to be found or
answered include the following:
1. Find the strength φ Mn.
2. Check the adequacy of a given beam, or
3. Find an allowable load that the beam can
carry.

CHAPTER 2c. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 13
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Rectangular Beam Analysis for


Moment
Q Example 1
Determine if the simply supported beam
shown in Fig. 1 is adequate as governed
by the ACI Code. The prescribed loads are
as follows:
wD = 0.80 kip/ft (excludes beam weight)
wL = 0.80 kip/ft
Assume that the compressive strength of
concrete is 4,000 psi, while the yield
strength of steel is 60,000 psi.

7
CHAPTER 2c. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 14
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Rectangular Beam Analysis for


Moment
Q Example 1 (cont’d)

12 kips 12 in.

wD + wL
20 in.
17.5 in.
4-#9
bars

10 ft 10 ft

CHAPTER 2c. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 15
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Rectangular Beam Analysis for


Moment
Q Example 1 (cont’d)
Area for No. 9 bar = 1.00 in 2 (see Table 2 or Table A - 2 Text)
Therefore, As = 4(1.00) = 4.00 in 2
Next we need to find the maximum and minimum
Reinforcement for this beam as specified by the ACI .
ρ max = 0.75 ρ b
Asmax = 0.75 Asb
ACI Code

0.85 f c′β1  87,000  0.85(4 )(0.85)  87 


ρb = =   = 0.02851
fy  f + 87,000  60  60 + 87 
 y 
Therefore, ρ max = 0.75 ρ b = 0.75(0.02851) = 0.0214

8
CHAPTER 2c. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 16
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Rectangular Beam Analysis for


Moment
Table 2. ASTM Standard - English Reinforcing Bars
Diameter Area Weight
Bar Designation
in in2 lb/ft
#3 [#10] 0.375 0.11 0.376
#4 [#13] 0.500 0.20 0.668
#5 [#16] 0.625 0.31 1.043
#6 [#19] 0.750 0.44 1.502
#7 [#22] 0.875 0.60 2.044
#8 [#25] 1.000 0.79 2.670
#9 [#29] 1.128 1.00 3.400
#10 [#32] 1.270 1.27 4.303
#11 [#36] 1.410 1.56 5.313
#14 [#43] 1.693 2.25 7.650
#18 [#57] 2.257 4.00 13.60
Note: Metric designations are in brackets

CHAPTER 2c. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 17
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Rectangular Beam Analysis for


Moment
Q Example 1 (cont’d) 12 in.

3 f c′ 200
As , min = bw d ≥ bw d ACI
fy fy 20 in.
17.5 in.
4-#9
3 4,000
As , min = (12)(17.5) ≥ 200 (12)(17.5) bars
60,000 60,000
As , min = 0.664 ≥ 0.700
Therefore, take As , min = 0.70 in 2

Calculate the steel ratio ρfor this beam:


As 4
ρ= = = 0.0191
bd 12(17.5)

9
CHAPTER 2c. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 18
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Rectangular Beam Analysis for


Moment
Q Example 1 (cont’d) 12 in.

Since ρ= 0.0191 < ρmax = 0.0214, failure


by yielding is assured. 20 in.
17.5 in.
Also, As = 4.00 in > 0.70 in OK
2 2
4-#9
bars

Note that ρmax = 0.75 ρb = 0.0214 can be obtained directly


from from Table 3 (Table A-5 Text).
Also note that As,min can be obtained from Table 3 (Table
A-5 Text) as follows
As,min = 0.0033 b d = 0.0033 (12)(17.5) = 0.693 ≈.70 in2

CHAPTER 2c. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 19
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Rectangular Beam Analysis for


Moment Table A-5 Textbook
 3 f c′ 200  Recommended Design Values
f c′ (psi )  ≥  ρmax = 0.75 ρb
 f y f y  ρb k (ksi)
Fy = 40,000 psi
3,000 0.0050 0.0278 0.0135 0.4828
4,000 0.0050 0.0372 0.0180 0.6438
5,000 0.0053 0.0436 0.0225 0.8047
Table 3 6,000 0.0058 0.0490
Fy = 50,000 psi
0.0270 0.9657

Design Constants 3,000 0.0040 0.0206 0.0108 0.4828


4,000 0.0040 0.0275 0.0144 0.6438
5,000 0.0042 0.0324 0.0180 0.8047
6,000 0.0046 0.0364 0.0216 0.9657
Fy = 60,000 psi
3,000 0.0033 0.0161 0.0090 0.4828
4,000 0.0033 0.0214 0.0120 0.6438
5,000 0.0035 0.0252 0.0150 0.8047
Values used in 6,000 0.0039 0.0283 0.0180 0.9657
Fy = 75,000 psi
the example. 3,000 0.0027 0.0116 0.0072 0.4828
4,000 0.0027 0.0155 0.0096 0.6438
5,000 0.0028 0.0182 0.0120 0.8047
6,000 0.0031 0.0206 0.0144 0.9657

10
CHAPTER 2c. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 20
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Rectangular Beam Analysis for


Moment
Q Example 1 (cont’d) 12 in.
N C = NT
0.85 f c′ba = As f y 20 in.
4(60 )
17.5 in.
As f y 4-#9
a= = = 5.88 in.
0.85(4 )(12 )
bars
0.85 f c′b
a 5.88
Z =d− = 17.5 − = 14.6 in.
2 2
Therefore, M n = As f y Z = 0.85 f c′baZ
3,504
M n = 4(60)(14.6) = 3,504 in - kips = ft - kips
12
Hence, M n = 292 ft - kips (based on Steel)

CHAPTER 2c. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 21
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Rectangular Beam Analysis for


Moment 12 kips
Q Example 1 (cont’d) wD + wL
– Service Loads:
The beam weight is to be calculated:
Beam weight = Volume × 0.150 kip/ft 10 ft 10 ft

 20 12  kip 
Weight =  ft × ft ×1ft   0.15  = 0.25 kip /ft
 12 12  ft 
Total uniform dead load, wD = 0.25 + 0.80 =1.05 kips/ft
Total uniform dead load, wL = 0.80 = kips/ft

Using Eq. 3 U = 1.4D +1.7L ACI Code

11
CHAPTER 2c. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 22
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Rectangular Beam Analysis for


Moment
Q Example 1 (cont’d) ACI Code
wu = 1.4wD + 1.7 wL φRn ≥ 1.4D +1.7L
= 1.4(1.05) + 1.7(0.80) = 2.83 kips/ft
Pu = 1.7 PL = 1.7(12) = 20.4 kips
wu L2 Pu L 2.83(20) 12(20)
2
Mu = + = + = 243.5 ft - kips
8 4 8 4
Check ACI Code Requirement:
φRn ≥ (1.4M D +1.7M L = Mu )
[0.9Mn = 0.9(292) = 262.8 ft - kips] > [Mu = 243.5 ft - kips] OK
Therefore the beam is adequate

CHAPTER 2c. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 23
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Rectangular Beam Analysis for


Moment
Q Example 1 (cont’d) Pu = 12 (1.7) = 20.4 kips

wu = 2.83 kips/ft
– Alternative way for finding Mu
wu = 1.4wD + 1.7 wL
= 1.4(1.05) + 1.7(0.80) = 2.83 kips/ft
10 ft 10 ft
38.5 k 38.5 k

The factored maximum moment 38.5 k 10.2 k


can be obtained from the
Shear V
moment diagram directly: 10.2 k 38.5 k
243.5 ft-k
M u = 243.5 ft - kips
Moment M

12
CHAPTER 2c. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 24
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Introduction to Slabs

Q Slabs are considered specialized type


of bending members.
Q They are used both in structural steel
and reinforced concrete construction.
Q Types of Slabs:
– One-way Slab
– Two-way Slab
• Flat Slab

CHAPTER 2c. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 25

Introduction to Slabs
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Typical Structure (1)

13
CHAPTER 2c. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 26

Introduction to Slabs
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Typical Structure (2)

CHAPTER 2c. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 27

Introduction to Slabs
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Floor-Column Systems

14
CHAPTER 2c. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 28

Introduction to Slabs
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Floor-Column Systems

CHAPTER 2c. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 29

Introduction to Slabs
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q One-Way Slab
– A one-way slab can be defined as a
structural reinforced concrete slab
supported on two opposite sides so that
the bending occurs in one direction only,
that is, perpendicular to the supported
edges.

15
CHAPTER 2c. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 30

Introduction to Slabs
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q One-Way Slab

CHAPTER 2c. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 31

Introduction to Slabs
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Two-Way Slab
– A two-way slab can be defined as a
structural reinforced concrete slab
supported along four edges so that the
bending occurs in two directions
perpendicular to each other.
– However, If the ratio of the lengths of the
two perpendicular sides is in excess of 2,
the slab may be assumed to act as a one-
way slab with bending primarily occurring
in the short direction.

16
CHAPTER 2c. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 32

Introduction to Slabs
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Flat Slab
– A specific type of two-
way slab is categorized
as a flat slab. A flat
slab may be defined as
a concrete slab
reinforced in two or
more directions,
generally without
beams or girders to
transfer the loads to the
supporting members.

CHAPTER 2c. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 33
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

One-Way Slab: Analysis for


Moment
Q In this course, we are concerned
primarily with one-way slab that is
assumed to be a rectangular beam with
width b = 12 in. as shown in Fig. 1.
Q When loaded with uniformly distributed
load, the slabs deflects so that it has
curvature, and therefore bending
moment, in only one direction (Fig. 1).

17
CHAPTER 2c. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 34
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

One-Way Slab: Analysis for


Moment
Q One-Way Slab Design
Figure 1
12′′

Analyze this strip


as a beam

The procedure for finding φMn for one-way slab is almost identical to
that of a beam.

CHAPTER 2c. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 35
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

One-Way Slab: Analysis for


Moment
Q ACI Code Requirements for Slabs
– Minimum Steel Area, As,min:
• For grade 40 or 50 steel:
As = 0.0020bh (5a)
• For grade 60 steel:
As = 0.0018bh (5b)
– Concrete protection:
• Concrete protection for reinforcement in slabs
must be not less than 0.75 in.
• For surfaces exposed to weather and ground,
min. protection is 2 in (#6 to #18) and 1.5 in (#5)

18
CHAPTER 2c. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 36
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

One-Way Slab: Analysis for


Moment
Q Example 2
– The one-way slab shown spans 12 ft from
center of the support to the center of
support. Calculate φMn and determine the
service live load (psf) that the slab may
carry. Use f c′ = 3,000 psi and fy = 40,000
psi. Section A-A
A
8′′

A ″
3
12 ft clear #8 @ 6” o.c
4

CHAPTER 2c. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 37
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

One-Way Slab: Analysis for


Moment
Q Example 2 (cont’d)
– Analyze a 12-in wide strip of slab:
– For f c′ = 3,000 psi and fy = 40,000 psi
ρ max = 0.0278 from Table 3 (Table A - 5 Text)
b = 12 in.
As , min = 0.0020(12)(8) = 0.19 in 2

As = 2(0.79) = 1.58 in 2 > 0.19 in 2 OK 8

d = 8 − 0.75 − 0.5 = 6.75 in. 3″ #8 @ 6” o.c


clear
A 1.58
ρ= s = = 0.0195 < 0.0278 OK
bd 12(6.75)
As f y 1.58(40 )
a= = = 2.07 in.
0.85 f c′b 0.85(3)(12 )

19
CHAPTER 2c. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 38
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

One-Way Slab: Analysis for


Moment
Table 2. ASTM Standard - English Reinforcing Bars
Diameter Area Weight
Bar Designation
in in2 lb/ft
#3 [#10] 0.375 0.11 0.376
#4 [#13] 0.500 0.20 0.668
#5 [#16] 0.625 0.31 1.043
#6 [#19] 0.750 0.44 1.502
#7 [#22] 0.875 0.60 2.044
#8 [#25] 1.000 0.79 2.670
#9 [#29] 1.128 1.00 3.400
#10 [#32] 1.270 1.27 4.303
#11 [#36] 1.410 1.56 5.313
#14 [#43] 1.693 2.25 7.650
#18 [#57] 2.257 4.00 13.60
Note: Metric designations are in brackets

CHAPTER 2c. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 39
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

One-Way Slab: Analysis for


Moment Table A-5 Textbook
 3 f c′ 200  Recommended Design Values
f c′ (psi )  ≥  ρmax = 0.75 ρb
 f y f y  ρb k (ksi)
Fy = 40,000 psi
3,000 0.0050 0.0278 0.0135 0.4828
4,000 0.0050 0.0372 0.0180 0.6438
5,000 0.0053 0.0436 0.0225 0.8047
Table 3 6,000 0.0058 0.0490
Fy = 50,000 psi
0.0270 0.9657

Design Constants 3,000 0.0040 0.0206 0.0108 0.4828


4,000 0.0040 0.0275 0.0144 0.6438
5,000 0.0042 0.0324 0.0180 0.8047
6,000 0.0046 0.0364 0.0216 0.9657
Fy = 60,000 psi
3,000 0.0033 0.0161 0.0090 0.4828
4,000 0.0033 0.0214 0.0120 0.6438
5,000 0.0035 0.0252 0.0150 0.8047
Values used in 6,000 0.0039 0.0283 0.0180 0.9657
Fy = 75,000 psi
the example. 3,000 0.0027 0.0116 0.0072 0.4828
4,000 0.0027 0.0155 0.0096 0.6438
5,000 0.0028 0.0182 0.0120 0.8047
6,000 0.0031 0.0206 0.0144 0.9657

20
CHAPTER 2c. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 40
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

One-Way Slab: Analysis for


Moment
Q Example 2 (cont’d)
a 2.07
Z =d− = 6.75 − = 5.72 in.
2 2
1.58(40)(5.72 )
M n = As f y Z = = 30.13 ft - kips
12
Therefore,
φM n = 0.9(30.13) = 27.1 ft - kips

wu L2
M u = φM n = 27.1 =
8
27.1(8) 27.1(8)
wu = = = 1.51 k/ft
L2 (12)2

CHAPTER 2c. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 41
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

One-Way Slab: Analysis for


Moment ACI Code
Q Example 2 (cont’d)
φRn ≥ 1.4D +1.7L
wu = 1.4 wD + 1.7 wL
8(12)
wD = weight of slab = (0.150) = 0.10 k/ft
144
1.51 = 1.4(0.10) + 1.7 wL
1.7 wL = 1.51 − 1.4(0.10 )
Hence,
1.51 − 1.4(0.1)
wL = = 0.806 k/ft = 806 psf
1.7

21
Reinforced Concrete Design Fifth Edition
CHAPTER
RECTANGULAR R/C
CONCRETE BEAMS:
TENSION STEEL ONLY
• A. J. Clark School of Engineering •Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering

Part I – Concrete Design and Analysis

By

2d
FALL 2002 Dr . Ibrahim. Assakkaf

ENCE 355 - Introduction to Structural Design


Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering
University of Maryland, College Park

CHAPTER 2d. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 1
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Rectangular Beam Design for


Moment (Tension Only)
Q In a general sense, the design
procedure for a rectangular cross
section of a reinforced beam basically
requires the determination of three
quantities.
Q The compressive strength of concrete f c′
and the yield strength fy of steel are
usually prescribed.

1
CHAPTER 2d. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 2
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Rectangular Beam Design for


Moment (Tension Only)
Q The three quantities that need to be
determined in a design problem for
rectangular reinforced concrete beam
are:
– Beam Width, b
– Beam Depth, d
– Steel Area, As.

CHAPTER 2d. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 3
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Rectangular Beam Design for


Moment (Tension Only)
Q Theoretically, a wide shallow beam may
have the same φMn as a narrow deep
beam.
Q However, practical considerations and
code requirements will affect the final
selection of these three quantities.
Q There is no easy way to determine the
best cross section, since economy
depends on much more than simply the
volume of concrete and amount of steel.

2
CHAPTER 2d. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 4
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Rectangular Beam Design for


Moment (Tension Only)
Q Simplified Design Formulas
– Using the internal couple method
previously developed for beam analysis,
modifications may be made whereby the
design process may be simplified.
– The resistance moment is given by

φM n = φN c Z = φN T Z (1)

CHAPTER 2d. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 5
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Rectangular Beam Design for


Moment (Tension Only)
Q Simplified Design Formulas
 a
φM n = φ (0.85 f c′)ba d −  (2)
 2
where
As f y
a= (3)
(0.85 f c′)b
The use of these formulas will now be simplified
through the development of design constants,
Which will eventually be tabulated.

3
CHAPTER 2d. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 6
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Rectangular Beam Design for


Moment (Tension Only)
Q Simplified Design Formulas
As
ρ= therefore As = ρbd (4)
bd
Substituting Eq. 4 into Eq. 3, yields
As f y ρbdf y ρdf y
a= = = (5)
(0.85 f c′)b (0.85 f c′)b 0.85 f ′
Let’s define the variable ω (omega) as
fy
ω=ρ (6)
f c′

CHAPTER 2d. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 7
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Rectangular Beam Design for


Moment (Tension Only)
Q Simplified Design Formulas
Substituting ω of Eq. 6 into Eq. 5, yields
ρdf y ωd
a= = (7)
0.85 f ′ 0.85
Substituting for a of Eq. 7 into Eq. 2, gives

 a ωd  ωd 
φM n = φ (0.85 f c′)ba d −  = φ (0.85 f c′)b  d− (8)
 2 0.85  2(0.85) 

4
CHAPTER 2d. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 8
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Rectangular Beam Design for


Moment (Tension Only)
Q Simplified Design Formulas
Eq. 8 can be simplified and rearranged to give

φM n = φbd 2 f c′ω (1 − 0.59ω ) (9)

Let’s define the coefficient of resistance k as

k = f c′ω (1− 0.59ω ) (10)


Tables A-7 through A-11 of the Textbook give the
value of k in ksi for values of ρ (i.e., 0.75ρb) and
various combinations of f c′ and fy.

CHAPTER 2d. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 9
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Rectangular Beam Design for


Moment (Tension Only)
Q Sample Coefficient of Resistance Vs.
Steel Ratio
f c′ = 3 ksi f y = 40 ksi f c′ = 4 ksi f y = 60 ksi

ρ k ρ k
0.0010 0.0397 0.0010 0.0595
0.0011 0.0436 0.0011 0.0654
0.0012 0.0475 0.0012 0.0712
0.0013 0.0515 0.0013 0.0771
0.0014 0.0554 0.0014 0.0830
0.0015 0.0593 0.0015 0.0888
0.0016 0.0632 0.0016 0.0946
0.0017 0.0671 0.0017 0.1005
0.0018 0.0710 0.0018 0.1063
0.0019 0.0749 0.0019 0.1121
0.0020 0.0787 0.0020 0.1179
0.0021 0.0826 0.0021 0.1237

5
CHAPTER 2d. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 10
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Rectangular Beam Design for


Moment (Tension Only)
Q Simplified Design Formulas
– The general analysis expression for φMn
may be written as
φM n = M u = φbd 2 k (in. - kips) (11a)
or
φbd 2 k
φM n = M u = (ft - kips) (11b)
12
NOTE: Values of k are tabulated in ksi

CHAPTER 2d. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 11
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Rectangular Beam Design for


Moment (Tension Only)
Q Note that Eq. 11 can also be used to
simplify the analysis of a reinforced
beam having a rectangular cross
section.
Q The following example was presented in
Chapter 2c of the lecture notes (Ex. 1)
and the beam was analyzed based on a
lengthy procedure. However, now this
beam will be analyzed based on Eq. 11.

6
CHAPTER 2d. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 12
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Rectangular Beam Design for


Moment (Tension Only)
Q Example 1
Find the nominal flexural strength and
design strength of the beam shown.
f c′ = 4,000 psi 12 in.

f y = 60,000psi
20 in.
17.5 in.
Four No. 9 bars provide As = 4.00 in2 4-#9
bars
As 4.00
ρ= = = 0.0190
bd 12(17.5)

(ρ min = 0.0033) < (ρ = 0.0190) < (ρ max = 0.0214) OK

CHAPTER 2d. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 13
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Rectangular Beam Design for


Moment (Tension Only) Table A-5 Textbook
 3 f c′ 200  Recommended Design Values
f c′ (psi )  ≥  ρmax = 0.75 ρb
 f y f y  ρb k (ksi)
Fy = 40,000 psi
3,000 0.0050 0.0278 0.0135 0.4828
4,000 0.0050 0.0372 0.0180 0.6438
5,000 0.0053 0.0436 0.0225 0.8047
Table 1 6,000 0.0058 0.0490
Fy = 50,000 psi
0.0270 0.9657

Design Constants 3,000 0.0040 0.0206 0.0108 0.4828


4,000 0.0040 0.0275 0.0144 0.6438
5,000 0.0042 0.0324 0.0180 0.8047
6,000 0.0046 0.0364 0.0216 0.9657
Fy = 60,000 psi
3,000 0.0033 0.0161 0.0090 0.4828
4,000 0.0033 0.0214 0.0120 0.6438
5,000 0.0035 0.0252 0.0150 0.8047
Values used in 6,000 0.0039 0.0283 0.0180 0.9657
Fy = 75,000 psi
the example. 3,000 0.0027 0.0116 0.0072 0.4828
4,000 0.0027 0.0155 0.0096 0.6438
5,000 0.0028 0.0182 0.0120 0.8047
6,000 0.0031 0.0206 0.0144 0.9657

7
CHAPTER 2d. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 14
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Rectangular Beam Design for


Moment (Tension Only)
Q Example 1 (cont’d)
– From Table 2 (Table A-10 , Text), with fy =
60,000 psi, f c′ = 4,000 psi, and ρ = 0.0190,
the value of k = 0.9489 ksi is found .
– Using Eq. 11b, the nominal and design
strengths are respectively
bd 2 k 12(17.5) (0.9489 )
2
Mn = = = 291 ft - kips
12 12
φM n = 0.9(291) = 262 ft - kips
Which are the same values obtained in the example of Ch.2c notes.

CHAPTER 2d. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 15
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Rectangular Beam Design for


Moment (Tension Only)
Q Example 1 (cont’d)
ρ k
0.0185 0.9283
0.0186 0.9323
0.0187 0.9363
Table 2 0.0188 0.9403
Part of Table A-10 0.0189 0.9443
0.0190 0.9489
of Textbook 0.0191 0.9523
0.0192 0.9563
0.0193 0.9602
0.0194 0.9642
0.0195 0.9681
0.0196 0.9720

8
CHAPTER 2d. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 16
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Rectangular Beam Design for


Moment (Tension Only)
Q ACI Code Requirements for Concrete
Protection for Reinforcement
– For beams, girders, and columns not
exposed to weather or in contact with the
ground, the minimum concrete cover on
any steel is 1.5 in.
– For slabs, it is 0.75 in.
– Clear space between bars in a single layer
shall not be less than the bar diameter, but
not less 1 in.

CHAPTER 2d. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 17
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Rectangular Beam Design for


Moment (Tension Only)
Q Stirrups
– Stirrups are special form of reinforcement
that primarily resist shear forces that will be
discussed later.

Tie steel
#3 stirrup
d h ″
1
1 clear (typical)
2
3-#9 bars

9
CHAPTER 2d. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 18
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Rectangular RC


Beam Design for Moment
Q A. Cross Section (b and h) Known;
Find the Required As:
1. Convert the service loads or moments to
design Mu (including the beam weight).
2. Based on knowing h, estimate d by using the
relationship d = h – 3 in. (conservative for
bars in a single layer). Calculate the required k
from
Mu (12)
k=
φbd 2

CHAPTER 2d. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 19
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Rectangular RC


Beam Design for Moment
3. From Tables A-7 through A-11 of your
textbook, find the required steel ratio ρ.
4. Compute the required As:
As = ρbd (13)
Check As,min by using Table A-5 of textbook.
5. Select the bars. Check to see if the bars can
fit into the beam in one layer (preferable).
Check the actual effective depth and compare
with the assumed effective depth. If the
actual effective depth is slightly in excess of

10
CHAPTER 2d. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 20
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Rectangular RC


Beam Design for Moment
the assumed effective depth, the design
will be slightly conservative (on the safe
side). If the actual effective depth is less
than the assumed effective depth, the
design is on the unconservative side and
should be revised.
6. Sketch the design showing the details of
the cross section and the reinforcement
exact location, and the stirrups, including
the tie bars.

CHAPTER 2d. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 21
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Rectangular RC


Beam Design for Moment
Q B. Design for Cross Section and
Required As:
1. Convert the service loads or moments to
design Mu. An estimated beam weight may
be included in the dead load if desired. Make
sure to apply the load factor to this additional
dead load.
2. Select the desired steel ratio ρ. (see Table A-5
of textbook for recommended values. Use the
ρ values from Table A-5 unless a small cross
section or decreased steel is desired).

11
CHAPTER 2d. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 22
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Rectangular RC


Beam Design for Moment
3. From Table A-5 of your textbook (or from
Tables A-7 through A-11), find k .
4. Assume b and compute the required d:
Mu
d= (14)
φb k

If the d/b ratio is reasonable (1.5 to 2.2), use


these values for the beam. If the d/b ratio is
not reasonable, increase or decrease b and
compute the new required d

CHAPTER 2d. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 23
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Rectangular RC


Beam Design for Moment
5. Estimate h and compute the beam weight.
Compare this with the estimated beam weight
if an estimated beam weight was included.
6. Revise the design Mu to include the moment
due to the beam’s own weight using the latest
weight determined. Note that at this point,
one could revert to step 2 in the previous
design procedure, where the cross section is
known.
7. Using b and k previously determined along
with the new total design Mu, find the new

12
CHAPTER 2d. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 24
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Rectangular RC


Beam Design for Moment
Required d from
Mu
d= (14)
φb k

Check to see if the d/b ratio is reasonable.


8. Find the required As:
As = ρbd (15)
Check As,min using Table A-5 of textbook.
9. Select the bars and check to see if the bars
can fit into a beam of width b in one layer
(preferable).

CHAPTER 2d. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 25
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Rectangular RC


Beam Design for Moment
10. Establish the final h, rounding this upward to
the next 0.5 in. This will make the actual
effective depth greater than the design
effective depth, and the design will be
slightly conservative (on the safe side).
11. Sketch the design showing the details of
the cross section and the exact locations
of the reinforcement and the stirrups,
including the tie bars.

13
CHAPTER 2d. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 26

Beam Design Examples


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 2
Design a rectangular reinforced concrete
beam to carry a service dead load moment
of 50 ft-kips (which includes the moment
due to the weight of the beam) and a
service live load moment of 100 ft-kips.
Architectural considerations require the
beam width to be 10 in. and the total depth
h to be 25 in. Use f c′ = 3,000 psi and fy =
60,000 psi.

CHAPTER 2d. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 27

Beam Design Examples


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 2 (cont’d)
Following procedure A outlined earlier,
1. The total design moment is
M u = 1.4 M D + 1.7 M L
= 1.4(50) + 1.7(100) = 240 ft - kips
2. Estimate d:
d = h − 3 = 25 − 3 = 22 in.

Mu 240(12)
required k = = = 0.6612 ksi
φbd 0.9(10)(22)
2 2

14
CHAPTER 2d. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 28

Beam Design Examples


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 2 (cont’d)
3. From Table 3 (Table A-8 Textbook), for k =
0.6612 and by interpolation,
ρ = 0.01301
From Table 1 (Table A-5 Textbook),
ρ max = 0.0161
4. Required As = ρbd = 0.01301(10) (22) = 2.86 in2
Check As, min. From Table 1 (Table A-5 Text),
As , min = 0.0033bw d = 0.0033(10)(22) = 0.73 in 2

CHAPTER 2d. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 29

Beam Design Examples


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 2 (cont’d) Table 3 (Table A-8 Textbook)


– By interpolation:
ρ k
0.6608 0.0130 0.0124 0.6355
0.6612 ρ 0.0125 0.6398
0.6649 0.0131 0.0126 0.6440
0.0127 0.6482
0.6608 0.0130 0.0128 0.6524
0.6612 ρ 0.0129 0.6566
0.6649 0.0131 0.013 0.6608
0.0131 0.6649
Therefore,
0.0132 0.6691
0.6612 - 0.6608 ρ − 0.0130 0.0133 0.6732
=
0.6649 - 0.6608 0.0131 − 0.0130 0.0134 0.6773
ρ = 0.01301 0.0135 0.6814

15
CHAPTER 2d. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 30

Beam Design Examples


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Table A-5 Textbook


 3 f c′ 200  Recommended Design Values
f c′ (psi )  ≥  ρmax = 0.75 ρb
 f y f y  ρb k (ksi)
Fy = 40,000 psi
3,000 0.0050 0.0278 0.0135 0.4828
4,000 0.0050 0.0372 0.0180 0.6438
5,000 0.0053 0.0436 0.0225 0.8047
Table 1 6,000 0.0058 0.0490
Fy = 50,000 psi
0.0270 0.9657

Design Constants 3,000 0.0040 0.0206 0.0108 0.4828


4,000 0.0040 0.0275 0.0144 0.6438
5,000 0.0042 0.0324 0.0180 0.8047
6,000 0.0046 0.0364 0.0216 0.9657
Fy = 60,000 psi
3,000 0.0033 0.0161 0.0090 0.4828
4,000 0.0033 0.0214 0.0120 0.6438
5,000 0.0035 0.0252 0.0150 0.8047
Values used in 6,000 0.0039 0.0283 0.0180 0.9657
Fy = 75,000 psi
the example. 3,000 0.0027 0.0116 0.0072 0.4828
4,000 0.0027 0.0155 0.0096 0.6438
5,000 0.0028 0.0182 0.0120 0.8047
6,000 0.0031 0.0206 0.0144 0.9657

CHAPTER 2d. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 31

Beam Design Examples


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 2 (cont’d)
5. Select the bars;
In essence, the the bar or combination od
bars that provide 2.86 in2 of steel area
will be satisfactory. From Table 4
2 No. 11 bars: As = 3.12 in2
3 No. 9 bars: As = 3.00 in2
4 No. 8 bars: As = 3.16 in2
5 No. 7 bars: As = 3.00 in2

16
CHAPTER 2d. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 32

Beam Design Examples


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 2 (cont’d)
Table 4. Areas of Multiple of Reinforcing Bars (in2)
Number Bar number
of bars #3 #4 $5 #6 #7 #8 #9 #10 #11
1 0.11 0.20 0.31 0.44 0.60 0.79 1.00 1.27 1.56
2 0.22 0.40 0.62 0.88 1.20 1.58 2.00 2.54 3.12
3 0.33 0.60 0.93 1.32 1.80 2.37 3.00 3.81 4.68
4 0.44 0.80 1.24 1.76 2.40 3.16 4.00 5.08 6.24
5 0.55 1.00 1.55 2.20 3.00 3.95 5.00 6.35 7.80
6 0.66 1.20 1.86 2.64 3.60 4.74 6.00 7.62 9.36
7 0.77 1.40 2.17 3.08 4.20 5.53 7.00 8.89 10.92
8 0.88 1.60 2.48 3.52 4.80 6.32 8.00 10.16 12.48
9 0.99 1.80 2.79 3.96 5.40 7.11 9.00 11.43 14.04
10 1.10 2.00 3.10 4.40 6.00 7.90 10.00 12.70 15.60

Table A-2 Textbook

CHAPTER 2d. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 33

Beam Design Examples


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 2 (cont’d)
The width of beam required for 3 No. 9
bars is 9.5 in. (see Table 5), which is
satisfactory. Note that beam width b = 10
in.
Check the actual effective depth d: #9 bar.
Actual d = h – cover – stirrup – db/2 See Table A-1
#3 bar for stirrup.
See Table A-1 for 1.128
Diameter of bar. 25 − 1.5 − 0.38 − = 22.6 in.
2
The actual effective depth is slightly higher than
the estimated one (22 in.). This will put the beam on
The safe side (conservative).

17
CHAPTER 2d. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 34

Beam Design Examples


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 2 (cont’d)
Table 5. Minimum Required Beam Width, b (in.)
Number Bar number
of bars # 3 and #4 $5 #6 #7 #8 #9 #10 #11
2 6.0 6.0 6.5 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.0
3 7.5 8.0 8.0 8.5 9.0 9.5 10.5 11.0
4 9.0 9.5 10.0 10.5 11.0 12.0 13.0 14.0
5 10.5 11.0 11.5 12.5 13.0 14.0 15.5 16.5
6 12.0 12.5 13.5 14.0 15.0 16.5 18.0 19.5
7 13.5 14.5 15.0 16.0 17.0 18.5 20.5 22.5
8 15.0 16.0 17.0 18.0 19.0 21.0 23.0 25.0
9 16.5 17.5 18.5 20.0 21.0 23.0 25.5 28.0
10 18.0 19.0 20.5 21.5 23.0 25.5 28.0 31.0

Table A-3 Textbook

CHAPTER 2d. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 35

Beam Design Examples


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 2 (cont’d)
Table 6. Reinforced Steel Properties Table A-1 Textbook
Bar number 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 14 18
Unit weight 0.376 0.668 1.043 1.502 2.044 2.670 3.400 4.303 5.313 7.650 13.60
per foot (lb)
Diameter (in.) 0.375 0.500 0.625 0.750 0.875 1.000 1.128 1.270 1.410 1.693 2.257
2
Area (in ) 0.11 0.20 0.31 0.44 0.60 0.79 1.00 1.27 1.56 2.25 4.00

6. Final Sketch
Tie steel
#3 stirrup
25′′ ″
1
1 clear (typical)
2
3-#9 bars

10′′

18
CHAPTER 2d. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 36

Beam Design Examples


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 3
Design a simply supported rectangular
reinforced beam with tension steel only to
carry a service load of 0.9 kip/ft and
service live load of 2.0 kips/ft. (the dead
load does not include the weight of the
beam.) The span is 18 ft. Assume No. 3
stirrups. Use f c′ = 4,000 psi and fy =
60,000 psi

CHAPTER 2d. RECTANGULAR R/C BEAMS: TENSION STEEL ONLY Slide No. 37

Beam Design Examples


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 3 (cont’d)
A

A
In this problem we have to determine
h, b, and As. This is called “free design”. h=?
This problem can solved according to As = ?
The outlines of Procedure B presented
earlier. For complete solution for this
problem, please see Example 2-8 of your b=?
Textbook.

19
Reinforced Concrete Design Fifth Edition
CHAPTER
REINFORCED CONCRETE
BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND
DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS
• A. J. Clark School of Engineering •Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering

Part I – Concrete Design and Analysis

By

3a
FALL 2002 Dr . Ibrahim. Assakkaf

ENCE 355 - Introduction to Structural Design


Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering
University of Maryland, College Park

CHAPTER 3a. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 1

Introduction to T-Beams
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Reinforced concrete structural systems


such as floors, roofs, decks, etc., are
almost monolithic, except for precast
systems.
Q Forms are built for beam sides the
underside of slabs, and the entire
construction is poured at once, from the
bottom of the deepest beam to the top
of the slab.

1
CHAPTER 3a. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 2

Introduction to T-Beams
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Floor-Column Systems

CHAPTER 3a. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 3

Introduction to T-Beams
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Beam and Girder System


– This system is composed of slab on
supporting reinforced concrete beams and
girder..
– The beam and girder framework is, in turn,
supported by columns.
– In such a system, the beams and girders
are placed monolithically with the slab.
– The typical monolithic structural system is
shown in Fig. 1.

2
CHAPTER 3a. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 4

Introduction to T-Beams
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Beam and Girder Floor System


Slab

Beam
Spandrel beam

Girder

Column

Figure 1

CHAPTER 3a. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 5

Introduction to T-Beams
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Common Beam and Girder Layout

Girder

Column
Girder Column Beam
Beam

Figure 2

3
CHAPTER 3a. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 6

Introduction to T-Beams
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Positive Bending Moment


– In the analysis and design of floor and roof
systems, it is common practice to assume
that the monolithically placed slab and
supporting beam interact as a unit in
resisting the positive bending moment.
– As shown in Fig. 3, the slab becomes the
compression flange, while the supporting
beam becomes the web or stem.

CHAPTER 3a. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 7

Introduction to T-Beams
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q T-Beam as Part of a Floor System


Effective Flange Width b
Slab

hf
Flange
d
Web or Stem

As
Supporting Beam
for Slab bw

Figure 3 Beam Spacing

4
CHAPTER 3a. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 8

Introduction to T-Beams
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q T-Beam
– The interacting flange and web produce
the cross section having the typical T-
shape, thus the T-Beam gets its name.
Q Negative Bending Moment
– It should be noted that when the the T-
Beam is subjected to negative moment, the
slab at the top of the stem (web) will be in
tension while the bottom of the stem is in
compression. This usually occurs at
interior support of continuous beam.

CHAPTER 3a. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 9

T-Beam Analysis
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q ACI Code Provisions for T-Beams


1. The effective flange width must not
exceed
a. One-fourth the span length
b. bw + 16hf
c. Center-to-center spacing of the beam
The smallest of the three values will control

2. For beam having a flange on one side only,


the effective overhanging flange width must

5
CHAPTER 3a. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 10

T-Beam Analysis
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q ACI Code Provisions for T-Beams


Not exceed one-twelfth of the span
length of the beam, nor six times the
slab thickness, nor one-half of the clear
distance to the next beam.
3. For isolated beam in which the T-shape is
used only for the purpose of providing
additional compressive area, the flange
thickness must not be less than one-half
of the width of the web, and the total
flange width must not be more than four
times the web width.

CHAPTER 3a. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 11

T-Beam Analysis
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q T-Beam Versus Rectangular Beam


– The ductility requirements for T-beams are
similar to those for rectangular beams.
– The maximum steel ratio ρ shall not
exceed 0.75ρb.
– However, this steel ratio is not the same
value as that tabulated for rectangular
beams because of the T-shaped
compressive area.

6
CHAPTER 3a. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 12

T-Beam Analysis
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Formulas for Balanced T-Beam


These formulas can be used to find Asb. It
will be illustrated in Example 1:

87,000
cb = d
f y + 87,000 (1)
ab = β1cb
[
N Cb = 0.85 f c′ bh f + bw (ab − h f ) ]
See Fig. 4 for definitions of variables

CHAPTER 3a. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 13

T-Beam Analysis
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Figure 4
b εc 0.85 f c′

hf a NC
c
N.A.
d
NT
bw εs

7
CHAPTER 3a. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 14

T-Beam Analysis
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Minimum Steel Ratio for T-Beams


– The T-beam is subjected to positive
moment:
• The steel area shall not be less than that given
by
3 f c′ 200 (2)
As , min = bw d ≥ bw d
fy fy
Note that the first expression controls if
f c′ > 4440 psi
ACI Code

CHAPTER 3a. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 15

T-Beam Analysis
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Minimum Steel Ratio for T-Beams


– The T-beam is subjected to negative
moment:
• The steel area As shall equal the smallest of the
following expression:

6 f c′ 3 f c′ (3)
As , min = smallest of bw d or bw d
fy fy

ACI Code

8
CHAPTER 3a. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 16

T-Beam Analysis
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Notes on the Analysis of T-Beams


– Because of the large compressive in the
flange of the T-beam, the moment strength
is usually limited by the yielding of the
tensile steel.
– Therefore, it safe to assume that the
tensile steel will yield before the concrete
reaches its ultimate strain.
– The ultimate tensile force may be found
from
N T = As f y (4)

CHAPTER 3a. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 17

T-Beam Analysis
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Notes on the Analysis of T-Beams


– In analyzing a T-beam, there might exist
two conditions:
1. The stress block may be completely within
the flange.
2. The stress block may cover the flange and
extend into the web.
– These two conditions will result in what
are termed: a rectangular T-beam and a
true T-beam, respectively.

9
CHAPTER 3a. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 18

T-Beam Analysis
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Stress Block Completely within the


Flange (Rectangular T-Beam)
b
εc 0.85 f c′

hf a NC
N.A.
d

NT
bw εs

CHAPTER 3a. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 19

T-Beam Analysis
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Stress Block Cover Flange and Extends


into Web (True T-Beam)
b εc 0.85 f c′

hf a NC
N.A.
d

NT
bw εs

10
CHAPTER 3a. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 20

T-Beam Analysis
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1
The T-beam shown
in the figure is part b = 32′′
of a floor system.
h f = 2′′
Determine the
practical moment d = 12′′
strength φMn if fy =
60,000 psi (A615 3 #9
grade 60) and f c′ = (As = 3 in2)

3,000 psi. bw = 10′′


Beams 32 in. o.c.

CHAPTER 3a. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 21

T-Beam Analysis
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1 (cont’d)
Since the span length is not given, we
determine the flange width in terms of the
flange thickness and beam spacing:
bw + 16h f = 10 + 16(2) = 42 in.
Beam spacing = 32 in. o.c.
Therefore,
Use b = 32 in. (smallest of the two)

11
CHAPTER 3a. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 22

T-Beam Analysis
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1 (cont’d)
Find NT assuming that the steel has
yielded:
NT = As f y = 3(60) = 180 kips
If the flange alone is stressed to 0.85 f c′ ,
then the total compressive force would be
N T = 0.85 f c′h f b = 0.85(3)(2 )(32) = 163.2 kips

Since 180 > 163, the beam should be


analyzed as true T-beam, and the stress
block will extend into the web (Fig. 5)

CHAPTER 3a. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 23

T-Beam Analysis
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1 (cont’d)

b = 32′′ εc 0.85 f c′
h f = 2′′
a NC
d = 12′′ N.A.
Z
3 #9
(As = 3 in2) NT
εs
bw = 10′′

Figure 5

12
CHAPTER 3a. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 24

T-Beam Analysis
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1 (cont’d)
The remaining compression is therefore
Remaining Compression = NT − N Cf
NT − N Cf = 0.85 f c′bw (a − h f )
NT − N Cf
a − hf =
0.85 f c′bw
NT − N Cf 180 − 163.2
a= + hf = + 2 = 2.66 in.
0.85 f c′bw 0.85(3)(10)

CHAPTER 3a. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 25

T-Beam Analysis
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1 (cont’d)
Check As, min using Eq. 3 or Table 1

From Table 1 (also Table A - 5 Text) :


As ,min = 0.0033bw d = 0.0033(10)(12) = 0.40 in 2
(A s = 3.0 in 2 ) > (As ,min = 0.4 in 2 ) OK
– In order to find the internal couple, we have
to find the couple arm Z:

y=
∑ Ay
∑A

13
CHAPTER 3a. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 26

T-Beam Analysis
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

(Table A-5 Text)


 3 f c′ 200  Recommended Design Values
f c′ (psi )  ≥  ρmax = 0.75 ρb
 f y f y  ρb k (ksi)
Fy = 40,000 psi
3,000 0.0050 0.0278 0.0135 0.4828
Table 1. 4,000
5,000
0.0050
0.0053
0.0372
0.0436
0.0180
0.0225
0.6438
0.8047
Design Constants 6,000 0.0058 0.0490 0.0270 0.9657
Fy = 50,000 psi
3,000 0.0040 0.0206 0.0108 0.4828
4,000 0.0040 0.0275 0.0144 0.6438
5,000 0.0042 0.0324 0.0180 0.8047
6,000 0.0046 0.0364 0.0216 0.9657
Fy = 60,000 psi
3,000 0.0033 0.0161 0.0090 0.4828
4,000 0.0033 0.0214 0.0120 0.6438
5,000 0.0035 0.0252 0.0150 0.8047
6,000 0.0039 0.0283 0.0180 0.9657
Fy = 75,000 psi
3,000 0.0027 0.0116 0.0072 0.4828
4,000 0.0027 0.0155 0.0096 0.6438
5,000 0.0028 0.0182 0.0120 0.8047
6,000 0.0031 0.0206 0.0144 0.9657

CHAPTER 3a. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 27

T-Beam Analysis
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1 (cont’d)
32′′ 0.85 f c′
y
A1 2′′
a = 2.66 NC
A2
12′′
Z
NT
10′′
Using a reference axis at the top:

y=
∑ Ay = [32(2)](1) + [10(0.66)](2 + 0.33) = 1.12 in
∑A 32(2 ) + 10(0.66)

14
CHAPTER 3a. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 28

T-Beam Analysis
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1 (cont’d)
Z can be computed as follows:
Z = d − y = 12 − 1.12 = 10.88 in.
Therefore,
180(1.88)
M n = NT Z = = 163.2 ft - kips
12
Thus the paratical moment is

φM n = 0.9(163.2 ) = 147 ft - kips

CHAPTER 3a. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 29

T-Beam Analysis
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1 (cont’d)
Alternately, the nominal moment can be found as follows:
32′′ 0.85 f c′
NCf
A1 2′a′ = 2.66
A2 NCw
12′′ Zf
Zw
NT
10′′ NT = N Cf + N Cw , or
N Cw = N T − N Cw = 180 − 163.2 = 16.8 ft - Kips
M n = Z f N Cf + Z w N Cw
1
= [(12 - 1)163.2 + (12 − 2 − 0.33)(16.8)] = 163.1 ft - kips
12

15
CHAPTER 3a. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 30

T-Beam Analysis
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1 (cont’d)
Check assumption for ductile failure:
From Eq. 1
87,000 87
cb = d= (12) = 7.10 in.
f y + 87,000 60 + 87
ab = β1cb = 0.85(7.1) = 6.035 in.

[
N Cb = 0.85 f c′ bh f + bw (ab − h f ) ]
= 0.85(3)[32(2) + 10(6.035 − 2)]
= 266.09 kips = NTb

CHAPTER 3a. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 31

T-Beam Analysis
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1 (cont’d)
NTb 266.09
Asb = = = 4.44 in 2
fy 60
As ,max = 0.75 Asb
= 0.75(4.44)
= 0.33
(A s ) (
= 3.0 in 2 < As ,max = 4.44 in 2 ) OK

16
Reinforced Concrete Design Fifth Edition
CHAPTER
REINFORCED CONCRETE
BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND
DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS
• A. J. Clark School of Engineering •Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering

Part I – Concrete Design and Analysis

By

3b
FALL 2002 Dr . Ibrahim. Assakkaf

ENCE 355 - Introduction to Structural Design


Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering
University of Maryland, College Park

CHAPTER 3b. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 1

Development of T-Beam As,max


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Basic Relationships
(a)
87,000 (1)
cb = d
f y + 87,000
From Fig. 1:
cb d d d
= = =
0.003 0.003 + ε s fy fy
0.003 + 0.003 +
Es 29 ×106
0.003 87,000
cb = d= d
fy 87,000 + f y
0.003 +
29 ×106

1
CHAPTER 3b. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 2

Development of T-Beam As,max


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Figure 1
Q Basic Relationships
b 0.85 f c′
0.003 a
2
ab N C = 0.85 f c′ab
cb
hf N.A
d ab
Z =d−
d − cb 2
3 #8 bars

εs N C = As f y
bw Strain

CHAPTER 3b. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 3

Development of T-Beam As,max


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Basic Relationships
Q (b) ab = 0.85cb (where β1 = 0.85) (2)

Q [
(c) N Cb = 0.85 f c′ bh f + bw ab − h f ( )] (3)

Q (d) N Cb = N Tb = Asb f y (4)

Q (e) As ,max = 0.75 Asb (5)

2
CHAPTER 3b. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 4

Development of T-Beam As,max


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Basic Relationships
Combining Eqs. 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5, and
solving for As, max, the following expression
is obtained:

0.638  β  87,000   
= f c′h f b + bw  b  d  −1 (6)
 87,000 + f   
As ,max
fy   h f  y   

Substituting for various combinations of f c′


and fy, As,max expressions result as listed in
Table 1 (Table 3-1 Text)

CHAPTER 3b. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 5

Development of T-Beam As,max


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Table 1. Expressions for As,max (T-Beams)


f c′ (psi) fy (psi) As,max (in2)
  0.582  
40,000 0.0478h f b + bw  d − 1 
  h f  
3,000
  0.503  
60,000 0.0319h f b + bw  d − 1 
  h f  
  0.582  
40,000 0.0638h f b + bw  d − 1 
  h f  
4,000
  0.503  
60,000 0.0425h f b + bw  d − 1 
  h f  

3
CHAPTER 3b. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 6

Development of T-Beam As,max


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Maximum Steel Reinforcement (ACI)


– The maximum steel reinforcement as
governed by the ACI Code can be
obtained using Table 1.
– If As exceeds As,max, then the beam should
be analyzed using As,max as an effective
steel area.

CHAPTER 3b. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 7

Development of T-Beam As,max


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1
– Find the practical moment strength φMn for
the T-beam in the floor system shown.
The beam span is 31 ft-6 in. Use fy =
60,000 psi and f c′ = 4,000 psi. Check the
steel to ensure that it is within allowable
limits.

4
CHAPTER 3b. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 8

Development of T-Beam As,max


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1 (cont’d)

1
5
2

32′′ #3 stirrup

3-#9

3-#9
15′′

8′ − 0′′ (typ.)

CHAPTER 3b. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 9

Development of T-Beam As,max


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1 (cont’d)
Determine b: As = 6.0 in 2 (6 No. 9 bars, See Table 2)

span 31.5(12)
= = 94.5 in.
4 4
16h f + bw = 16(5.5) + 15 = 103 in.
Beam spacing = 8(12) = 96 in.
Therefore, use b = 94.5 in.
For As,min, CHECK:

As ,min = 0.0033(bw )(d ) = 0.0033(15)(32 ) = 1.58 in 2 < 6.0 in 2 OK


See Table 3

5
CHAPTER 3b. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 10

Development of T-Beam As,max


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1 (cont’d)
Table 2. Areas of Multiple of Reinforcing Bars (in2)
Number Bar number
of bars #3 #4 $5 #6 #7 #8 #9 #10 #11
1 0.11 0.20 0.31 0.44 0.60 0.79 1.00 1.27 1.56
2 0.22 0.40 0.62 0.88 1.20 1.58 2.00 2.54 3.12
3 0.33 0.60 0.93 1.32 1.80 2.37 3.00 3.81 4.68
4 0.44 0.80 1.24 1.76 2.40 3.16 4.00 5.08 6.24
5 0.55 1.00 1.55 2.20 3.00 3.95 5.00 6.35 7.80
6 0.66 1.20 1.86 2.64 3.60 4.74 6.00 7.62 9.36
7 0.77 1.40 2.17 3.08 4.20 5.53 7.00 8.89 10.92
8 0.88 1.60 2.48 3.52 4.80 6.32 8.00 10.16 12.48
9 0.99 1.80 2.79 3.96 5.40 7.11 9.00 11.43 14.04
10 1.10 2.00 3.10 4.40 6.00 7.90 10.00 12.70 15.60

Table A-2 Textbook

CHAPTER 3b. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 11

Development of T-Beam As,max


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1 (cont’d) Table A-5 Textbook


 3 f c′ 200  Recommended Design Values
f c′ (psi )  ≥  ρmax = 0.75 ρb
 f y f y  ρb k (ksi)
Fy = 40,000 psi
3,000 0.0050 0.0278 0.0135 0.4828
4,000 0.0050 0.0372 0.0180 0.6438
5,000 0.0053 0.0436 0.0225 0.8047
Table 3 6,000 0.0058 0.0490
Fy = 50,000 psi
0.0270 0.9657

Design Constants 3,000 0.0040 0.0206 0.0108 0.4828


4,000 0.0040 0.0275 0.0144 0.6438
5,000 0.0042 0.0324 0.0180 0.8047
6,000 0.0046 0.0364 0.0216 0.9657
Fy = 60,000 psi
3,000 0.0033 0.0161 0.0090 0.4828
4,000 0.0033 0.0214 0.0120 0.6438
5,000 0.0035 0.0252 0.0150 0.8047
Value used in 6,000 0.0039 0.0283 0.0180 0.9657
Fy = 75,000 psi
the example. 3,000 0.0027 0.0116 0.0072 0.4828
4,000 0.0027 0.0155 0.0096 0.6438
5,000 0.0028 0.0182 0.0120 0.8047
6,000 0.0031 0.0206 0.0144 0.9657

6
CHAPTER 3b. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 12

Development of T-Beam As,max


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1 (cont’d)
Check beam ductility by comparing As,max
with actual As:
From Table 1 (Table 3-1, Text)
  0.503  
As ,max = 0.0425h f b + bw  − 1 
  h f  

= 0.0425(5.5)94.5 + 15
 0.503
(32) − 1  = 28.8 in 2
  5.5 
Since (As = 6 in2) < As,max =28.8 in2 OK
The beam meets the ductility requirements,
and the steel yields at the ultimate moment.

CHAPTER 3b. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 13

Development of T-Beam As,max


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1 (cont’d)
Determine if the beam can be analyzed as a
rectangular T-beam or true T-beam:
N T = As f y = 6(60 ) = 360 kips
N Cf = 0.85 f c′bh f = 0.85(4 )(94.5)(5.5) = 1,767.2 kips
Since (NCf = 1,767.2 k) > (NT = 360 k), the beam can be
analyzed as a rectangular T-beam (simple analysis).
For flexure: As f y 6(60 )
a= = = 1.12 in.
0.85 f c′b 0.85(4 )(94.5)
a 1.12
Z = d − = 32 − = 31.44 in.
2 2

7
CHAPTER 3b. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 14

Development of T-Beam As,max


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1 (cont’d)
φM = φA f Z =
(0.9)(6)(60)(31.44) = 849 ft - kips
n s y
12

Alternative method for finding φMn:


As 6
ρ= = = 0.002
bd 94.5(32 )
For ρ= 0.002, go to Table 4 (Table A-10, Text) and find the
Required k :

required k = 0.1179
0.9(94.5)(32 ) (0.1179 )
2
φM n = φbd 2 k = = 856 ft - kips
12

CHAPTER 3b. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 15

Development of T-Beam As,max


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1 (cont’d) Table A-10 Textbook


ρ k
0.0010 0.0595
0.0011 0.0654
0.0012 0.0712
Table 4. 0.0013 0.0771
Coefficient of Resistance 0.0014 0.0830
0.0015 0.0888
0.0016 0.0946
0.0017 0.1005
Value used in 0.0018 0.1063
the example. 0.0019 0.1121
0.0020 0.1179
0.0021 0.1237

8
CHAPTER 3b. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 16

T-Beam Design (For Moment)


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Quantities that need to be determined


in the design of a T-beam are:
1. Flange Dimensions: b
– Effective Width, b
– Thickness, hf
2. Web Dimensions:
hf
– Width, bw
d
– Height
3. Area of Tension Steel, As Steel bars

bw

CHAPTER 3b. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 17

T-Beam Design (For Moment)


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q In normal situations, the flange


thickness is determined by the design of
the slab, and the web size is determined
by the shear and moment requirements
at the end of the supports for
continuous beam.
Q Column size sometimes dictate web
width.

9
CHAPTER 3b. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 18

T-Beam Design (For Moment)


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q ACI code dictates permissible effective


flange width, b.
Q The flange itself generally provides
more than sufficient compression area;
therefore the stress block usually lies
completely in the flange.
Q Thus, most T-beam are only wide
rectangular beams with respect to
flexural behavior.

CHAPTER 3b. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 19

T-Beam Design (For Moment)


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Design Method
– The recommended design method
depends whether the beam behaves as a
rectangular T-beam or a true T-beam.
– For rectangular-T-Beam behavior, the
design procedure is the same as for the
tensile reinforced rectangular beam.
– For true-T-beam behavior, the design
proceeds by designing a flange component
and a web components and combining the
two.

10
CHAPTER 3b. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 20

T-Beam Design (For Moment)


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 2
Design the T-beam for the floor system
shown in the figure. The floor has a 4-in.
slab supported by 22-ft-span-length beams
cast monolithically with the slab. Beams
are 8 ft-0 in. on center and have a web
width of 12 in. and a total depth = 22 in.; fy
= 60,000 psi (A615 grade 60) and f c′ =3000
psi. Service loads are 0.125 ksf live load
and 0.2 ksf dead load. The given dead
load does not include the weight of the
floor system.

CHAPTER 3b. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 21

T-Beam Design (For Moment)


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 2 (cont’d)

4′′

22

12′′

8′ − 0′′ (typ.)

11
CHAPTER 3b. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 22

T-Beam Design (For Moment)


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 2 (cont’d)
Determine the Design Moment Mu:
slab weight =
(8 ×12)(4) (0.150) = 0.4 k/ft
144
Stem (or web) weight =
(12)(22 − 4) (0.150) = 0.225 k/ft
144
Total = 0.625 k/ft
service DL = (8)(0.2 ) = 1.6 k/ft
service LL = (8)(0.125) = 1.0 k/ft
U = 1.4D +1.7L ACICode
wu = 1.4(0.625 + 1.6) + 1.7(1) = 4.815 k/ft

CHAPTER 3b. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 23

T-Beam Design (For Moment)


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 2 (cont’d) wu

wu L2 4.815(22 )
2
Mu = = = 291 ft - kips
8 8
22 in. 22 in.
e am =
of B
Span

12
CHAPTER 3b. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 24

T-Beam Design (For Moment)


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 2 (cont’d)
Assume an effective depth d = h – 3
d = 22 − 3 = 19 in.
Find the effective flange width, b:
1 1 Controls
span length = (22 ×12 ) = 66 in.
4 4
bw + 16h f = 12 + 16(4 ) = 76 in.
beam spacing = 8 ×12 = 96 in.
Therefore, use b = 66 in. (smallest)

CHAPTER 3b. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 25

T-Beam Design (For Moment)


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 2 (cont’d)
Find out what type of beam to be used for
design analysis, i.e., Is it a rectangular T-
beam or a true T-beam?
b = 66′′

Assumed
22′′ 19′′ h f = 66′′

 hf 
φM nf = φ (0.85 f c′)bh f  d − 
 2 
0.9(0.85)(3)(66 )(4 )  4 12′′
= 19 −  = 858.3 ft - kips
12  2

13
CHAPTER 3b. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 26

T-Beam Design (For Moment)


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 2 (cont’d)
Because (φMnf = 858.3 ft-k) > (Mu = 291 ft-k), therefore
a < hf, and the total effective flange need not be
completely used in compression.

The beam can be analyzed as rectangular T-beam

Design a rectangular beam:


Mu 291×12
required k = = = 0.1628 ksi
φbd 0.9(66 )(19 )
2 2

required ρ = 0.0028 From Table 5

CHAPTER 3b. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 27

T-Beam Design (For Moment)


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 2 (cont’d) Table A-8 Textbook


ρ k
0.0020 0.1172
0.0021 0.1229
0.0022 0.1286
Table 5. 0.0023 0.1343
Coefficient of Resistance 0.0024 0.1399
0.0025 0.1456
0.0026 0.1512
0.0027 0.1569
Value used in 0.0028 0.1625
the example. 0.0029 0.1681
0.0030 0.1736
0.0031 0.1792

14
CHAPTER 3b. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 28

T-Beam Design (For Moment)


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 2 (cont’d)
Calculate the required steel area:
required As = ρbd = 0.0028(66)(19 ) = 3.51 in 2
Select the steel bars:
Use 3 #10 bars ( As = 3.81 in 2 ) From Table 2
Table 6
Minimum bw = 10.5 in. < 66 in. OK
Check the effective depth, d: Diameter of #10 bar
See Table 7
Diameter of #3 Stirrup
1.27
See Table 7 d = 22 − 1.5 − 0.375 − = 19.49 in.
2

19.49 in. > 19 in. OK

CHAPTER 3b. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 29

T-Beam Design (For Moment)


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 2 (cont’d)
Table 2. Areas of Multiple of Reinforcing Bars (in2)
Number Bar number
of bars #3 #4 $5 #6 #7 #8 #9 #10 #11
1 0.11 0.20 0.31 0.44 0.60 0.79 1.00 1.27 1.56
2 0.22 0.40 0.62 0.88 1.20 1.58 2.00 2.54 3.12
3 0.33 0.60 0.93 1.32 1.80 2.37 3.00 3.81 4.68
4 0.44 0.80 1.24 1.76 2.40 3.16 4.00 5.08 6.24
5 0.55 1.00 1.55 2.20 3.00 3.95 5.00 6.35 7.80
6 0.66 1.20 1.86 2.64 3.60 4.74 6.00 7.62 9.36
7 0.77 1.40 2.17 3.08 4.20 5.53 7.00 8.89 10.92
8 0.88 1.60 2.48 3.52 4.80 6.32 8.00 10.16 12.48
9 0.99 1.80 2.79 3.96 5.40 7.11 9.00 11.43 14.04
10 1.10 2.00 3.10 4.40 6.00 7.90 10.00 12.70 15.60

Table A-2 Textbook

15
CHAPTER 3b. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 30

T-Beam Design (For Moment)


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 2 (cont’d)
Table 6. Minimum Required Beam Width, b (in.)
Number Bar number
of bars # 3 and #4 $5 #6 #7 #8 #9 #10 #11
2 6.0 6.0 6.5 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.0
3 7.5 8.0 8.0 8.5 9.0 9.5 10.5 11.0
4 9.0 9.5 10.0 10.5 11.0 12.0 13.0 14.0
5 10.5 11.0 11.5 12.5 13.0 14.0 15.5 16.5
6 12.0 12.5 13.5 14.0 15.0 16.5 18.0 19.5
7 13.5 14.5 15.0 16.0 17.0 18.5 20.5 22.5
8 15.0 16.0 17.0 18.0 19.0 21.0 23.0 25.0
9 16.5 17.5 18.5 20.0 21.0 23.0 25.5 28.0
10 18.0 19.0 20.5 21.5 23.0 25.5 28.0 31.0

Table A-3 Textbook

CHAPTER 3b. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 31

T-Beam Design (For Moment)


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 2 (cont’d)
Table 7. ASTM Standard - English Reinforcing Bars
Diameter Area Weight
Bar Designation
in in2 lb/ft
#3 [#10] 0.375 0.11 0.376
#4 [#13] 0.500 0.20 0.668
#5 [#16] 0.625 0.31 1.043
#6 [#19] 0.750 0.44 1.502
#7 [#22] 0.875 0.60 2.044
#8 [#25] 1.000 0.79 2.670
#9 [#29] 1.128 1.00 3.400
#10 [#32] 1.270 1.27 4.303
#11 [#36] 1.410 1.56 5.313
#14 [#43] 1.693 2.25 7.650
#18 [#57] 2.257 4.00 13.60
Note: Metric designations are in brackets

16
CHAPTER 3b. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 32

T-Beam Design (For Moment)


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 2 (cont’d)
Alternative Method for finding required As:
As f y As (60 )
a= = 0.3565 As
0.85 f c′b 0.85(3)(66 )
a 0.3565 As
Z =d− = 19 −
2 2
 0.3565 As 
φM n = M u = 291× 12 = φAs f y Z = 0.9 As (60 )19 − 
 2 
or,
9.6255 As2 − 1026 As + 3492 = 0 (Quadratic Eq.)
From which,
As = 3.52 in 2

CHAPTER 3b. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 33

T-Beam Design (For Moment)


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 2 (cont’d)
Check As,min from Table 3 (Table A-5, Text):
As ,min = 0.0033bw d
= 0.0033(12 )(19 ) = 0.75 in 2
(A s ) (
= 3.81 in 2 > As ,min = 0.75 in 2 ) OK
Check As,min from Table 1 (Table 3-1, Text):

  0.503     0.503(19.49)  
As ,max = 0.0319h f b + bw  d − 1  = 0.0319(4)66 + 12 − 1 
  fh     4 

= 10.64 in 2 > (As = 3.81 in 2 ) OK

17
CHAPTER 3b. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 34

T-Beam Design (For Moment)


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1 (cont’d) Table A-5 Textbook


 3 f c′ 200  Recommended Design Values
f c′ (psi )  ≥  ρmax = 0.75 ρb
 f y f y  ρb k (ksi)
Fy = 40,000 psi
3,000 0.0050 0.0278 0.0135 0.4828
4,000 0.0050 0.0372 0.0180 0.6438
5,000 0.0053 0.0436 0.0225 0.8047
Table 3 6,000 0.0058 0.0490
Fy = 50,000 psi
0.0270 0.9657

Design Constants 3,000 0.0040 0.0206 0.0108 0.4828


4,000 0.0040 0.0275 0.0144 0.6438
5,000 0.0042 0.0324 0.0180 0.8047
6,000 0.0046 0.0364 0.0216 0.9657
Fy = 60,000 psi
3,000 0.0033 0.0161 0.0090 0.4828
4,000 0.0033 0.0214 0.0120 0.6438
5,000 0.0035 0.0252 0.0150 0.8047
Value used in 6,000 0.0039 0.0283 0.0180 0.9657
Fy = 75,000 psi
the example. 3,000 0.0027 0.0116 0.0072 0.4828
4,000 0.0027 0.0155 0.0096 0.6438
5,000 0.0028 0.0182 0.0120 0.8047
6,000 0.0031 0.0206 0.0144 0.9657

CHAPTER 3b. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 35

T-Beam Design (For Moment)


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Table 1. Expressions for As,max (T-Beams)


f c′ (psi) fy (psi) As,max (in2)
  0.582  
40,000 0.0478h f b + bw  d − 1 
  h f  
3,000
  0.503  
60,000 0.0319h f b + bw  d − 1 
  h f  
  0.582  
40,000 0.0638h f b + bw  d − 1 
  h f  
4,000
  0.503  
60,000 0.0425h f b + bw  d − 1 
  h f  

18
CHAPTER 3b. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 36

T-Beam Design (For Moment)


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1 (cont’d)
Final Detailed Sketch of the Design:

Tie steel bars

#3 stirrup
22′′ ″
1
1 clear (typical)
2
3-#10 bars

12′′

19
Reinforced Concrete Design Fifth Edition
CHAPTER
REINFORCED CONCRETE
BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND
DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS
• A. J. Clark School of Engineering •Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering

Part I – Concrete Design and Analysis

By

3c
FALL 2002 Dr . Ibrahim. Assakkaf

ENCE 355 - Introduction to Structural Design


Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering
University of Maryland, College Park

CHAPTER 3c. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 1
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Analysis of T-Beams


For Moments
1. Establish the effective flange width, b
based on ACI criteria.
2. Check As,min. Use Table 1 (Table A-5,
Textbook).
3. Check the ACI Code ductility
requirements using the proper
expression for As,max from Eq. 1 or
Table 2 (Table 3-1, Textbook). As,max
must be larger than actual As.

1
CHAPTER 3c. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 2
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Analysis of T-Beams


For Moments
Table A-5 Textbook
 3 f c′ 200  Recommended Design Values
f c′ (psi )  ≥  ρmax = 0.75 ρb
 f y f y  ρb k (ksi)
Fy = 40,000 psi
3,000 0.0050 0.0278 0.0135 0.4828
4,000 0.0050 0.0372 0.0180 0.6438
Table 1 5,000 0.0053 0.0436 0.0225 0.8047
6,000 0.0058 0.0490 0.0270 0.9657
Design Constants Fy = 50,000 psi
3,000 0.0040 0.0206 0.0108 0.4828
4,000 0.0040 0.0275 0.0144 0.6438
5,000 0.0042 0.0324 0.0180 0.8047
6,000 0.0046 0.0364 0.0216 0.9657
Fy = 60,000 psi
3,000 0.0033 0.0161 0.0090 0.4828
4,000 0.0033 0.0214 0.0120 0.6438
5,000 0.0035 0.0252 0.0150 0.8047
6,000 0.0039 0.0283 0.0180 0.9657
Fy = 75,000 psi
3,000 0.0027 0.0116 0.0072 0.4828
4,000 0.0027 0.0155 0.0096 0.6438
5,000 0.0028 0.0182 0.0120 0.8047
6,000 0.0031 0.0206 0.0144 0.9657

CHAPTER 3c. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 3
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Analysis of T-Beams


For Moments
Table 2. Expressions for As,max (T-Beams)
f c′ (psi) fy (psi) As,max (in2)
  0.582  
40,000 0.0478h f b + bw  d − 1 
  h f  
3,000   0.503  
0.0319h f b + bw  d − 1 
60,000   h f  
  0.582  
40,000 0.0638h f b + bw  d − 1 
  h f  
4,000   0.503  
60,000 0.0425h f b + bw  d − 1 
  h f  

2
CHAPTER 3c. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 4
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Analysis of T-Beams


For Moments
Q The check the ductility of a T-beam, the
following equation can be used for
various combinations of f c′ and fy

0.638  β  87,000   
As ,max = f c′h f b + bw  b  d  − 1  (1)
fy  h f  87,000 + f  
  y   

CHAPTER 3c. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 5
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Analysis of T-Beams


For Moments
4. Compute the total tension in the steel:
N T = As f y
5. Compute the magnitude of the
compression that the flange its is
capable of furnishing:
N Cf = 0.85 f c′bh f
6. If NT > NCf, the beam will behave as a
true T-beam, and the remaining
compression, which equals NT - NCf

3
CHAPTER 3c. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 6
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Analysis of T-Beams


For Moments
will be furnished by additional web
area. If NT < NCf, the beam will behave
as a rectangular beam of width b.
Rectangular T-Beam
7. Compute the actual steel ratio in order
to find k :
As
ρ=
bd

CHAPTER 3c. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 7
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Analysis of T-Beams


For Moments
8. Consult the proper Table 3, (Tables A-
7 to A-11, Text) and find the required
k for the ρvalue from step 7.
9. Compute the practical moment
capacity φMn of the beam cross
section:

φM n = φbd 2 k

4
CHAPTER 3c. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 8
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Analysis of T-Beams


For Moments
Table A-10 Textbook
Sample Values ρ k
0.0010 0.0595
0.0011 0.0654
0.0012 0.0712
Table 3. 0.0013 0.0771
Coefficient of Resistance 0.0014 0.0830
0.0015 0.0888
0.0016 0.0946
0.0017 0.1005
0.0018 0.1063
0.0019 0.1121
0.0020 0.1179
0.0021 0.1237

CHAPTER 3c. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 9
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Analysis of T-Beams


For Moments
True T-Beam
7. Determine the depth of the
compressive stress block:
NT − N Cf
a= + hf
0.85 f c′bw
8. (a) Locate the centroid of the total
compressive area referenced to top of
the flange using the relationship

5
CHAPTER 3c. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 10
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Analysis of T-Beams


For Moments
y=
∑ Ay
∑A
From which
Z =d−y
Compute the practical moment
capacity φMn of the beam:
φM n = φN C Z or φNT Z

CHAPTER 3c. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 11
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Analysis of T-Beams


For Moments
Or
(b) Calculate φMn using a summation
of internal couples contributed by the
flange and the web:

  hf    a − hf  
φM n = φ  N Cf  d −  + (NT − N Cf )d − h f   
  2    2  

6
CHAPTER 3c. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 12
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Analysis of T-Beams


For Moments
Q Example 1: T-Beam Analysis
Determine the practical moment capacity
φMn for the T-beam in the floor system
shown. The beam span is 24 in. Use fy =
60,000 psi and f c′ = 3,000 psi. Check the
steel to ensure that it is within allowable
limits according to the ACI Code.

CHAPTER 3c. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 13
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Analysis of T-Beams


For Moments
Q Example 1: T-Beam Analysis (cont’d)

4′′

24′′

3-#9

3-#9
10′′

5′ − 0′′ (typ.)

7
CHAPTER 3c. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 14
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Design of T-Beams


For Moments
1. Compute the design moment Mu.
2. Assume that the effective depth d is
equal to h – 3 in.
3. Establish the effective flange width based
on ACI criteria.
4. Compute the practical moment strength
φMnf assuming that the total effective
flange is in compression:
 h 
φM nf = φ (0.85 f c′)bh f  d − f 
 2 

CHAPTER 3c. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 15
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Design of T-Beams


For Moments
5. If φMnf > Mu the beam will behave as
rectangular T-beam of width b.
Otherwise, the beam will behave as a
true T-beam.
Rectangular T-Beam
6. Design as a rectangular beam with b
and d as known values. Compute the
required k : Mu
required k =
φbd 2

8
CHAPTER 3c. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 16
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Design of T-Beams


For Moments
7. From the tables in Appendix A of
textbook (see Table 3), determine the
required ρ for the required k of step 6.
8. Compute the required As:
required As = ρbd
9. Select bars and check the beam width.
Check the actual d and compare it with
the assumed d. If the actual d is
slightly in excess of the assumed d,

CHAPTER 3c. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 17
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Design of T-Beams


For Moments
the design will be slightly conservative.
If the actual d is less than the
assumed d, the design may be on the
nonconservative side (depending on
the steel provided) and should be
more closely investigated for possible
revision.
10. Check As,min. Use Table 1 (Table A-5,
Textbook).

9
CHAPTER 3c. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 18
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Design of T-Beams


For Moments
11. Check the ACI ductility requirement
using the proper expression for As,max
from Table 2 (Table 3-1 Text) or Eq. 1.
Note that As,max must be larger than
actual As.
12. Sketch the design.

CHAPTER 3c. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 19
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Design of T-Beams


For Moments
True T-Beam
6. Using an estimated df = h – 3 in. and
Zf = df – hf/2, determine the steel area
As required for the flange couple:
φM nf
required Asf =
φf y Z f
7. Design the web couple as a
rectangular reinforced concrete beam

10
CHAPTER 3c. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 20
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Design of T-Beams


For Moments
having a total depth hw = h – hf using
an estimated dw = hw – 3 in. and a
beam width of bw. Design for an
applied moment Mu - φ Mnf.
Determine required k , required ρ,
and required Asw.
8. Total required Asw = Asf + Asw.
9. Select the bars. Bars must fit into
beam width bw. Check d as in step 9

CHAPTER 3c. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 21
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Design of T-Beams


For Moments
of the rectangular T-beam design.
10. Check As,min. Use Table 1 (Table A-5,
Textbook).
11. Check As,max. Use Table 2 (Table 3-1,
Textbook) or Eq. 1.
12. Sketch the design.

11
CHAPTER 3c. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 22
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Design of T-Beams


For Moments
Q Example: T-Beam Design
Design a T-beam having a cross section
shown in the figure. Assume that the
effective flange width given is acceptable.
The T-beam will carry a total design
moment Mu of 340 ft-kips. Use f c′ = 3,000
psi and fy = 60,000 psi. Use 1.5-in. cover
and No. 3 stirrups.

CHAPTER 3c. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 23
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Design of T-Beams


For Moments
Q Example: T-Beam Design (cont’d)

27′′


1
3
2
22′′

12′′

12
Reinforced Concrete Design Fifth Edition
CHAPTER
REINFORCED CONCRETE
BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND
DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS
• A. J. Clark School of Engineering •Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering

Part I – Concrete Design and Analysis

By

3d
FALL 2002 Dr . Ibrahim. Assakkaf

ENCE 355 - Introduction to Structural Design


Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering
University of Maryland, College Park

CHAPTER 3d. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 1

Doubly Reinforced Beams


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Introduction
– If a beam cross section is limited because
of architectural or other considerations, it
may happen that concrete cannot develop
the compression force required to resist
the given bending moment.
– In this case, reinforcing steel bars are
added in the compression zone, resulting
in a so-called doubly reinforced beam,
that is one with compression as well as
tension reinforcement. (Fig. 1)

1
CHAPTER 3d. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 2

Doubly Reinforced Beams


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Introduction (cont’d)

Figure 1. Doubly Reinforced Beam

d′ b

As′

h d

As

CHAPTER 3d. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 3

Doubly Reinforced Beams


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Introduction (cont’d)
– The use of compression reinforcement has
decreased markedly with the use of
strength design methods, which account
for the full strength potential of the
concrete on the compressive side of the
neutral axis.
– However, there are situations in which
compressive reinforcement is used for
reasons other than strength.

2
CHAPTER 3d. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 4

Doubly Reinforced Beams


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Introduction (cont’d)
– It has been found that the inclusion of
some compression steel has the following
advantages:
• It will reduce the long-term deflections of
members.
• It will set a minimum limit on bending loading
• It act as stirrup-support bars continuous
through out the beam span.

CHAPTER 3d. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 5

Doubly Reinforced Beams


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Introduction (cont’d)
– Another reason for placing reinforcement in
the compression zone is that when beams
span more than two supports (continuous
construction), both positive and negative
moments will exist as shown in Fig. 2.
– In Fig. 2, positive moments exist at A and
C; therefore, the main tensile
reinforcement would be placed in the
bottom of the beam.

3
CHAPTER 3d. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 6

Doubly Reinforced Beams


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Introduction (cont’d)

A C
B

Moment
+ + +
Diagram - -

Figure 2. Continuous Beam

CHAPTER 3d. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 7

Doubly Reinforced Beams


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Introduction (cont’d)
– At B, however, a negative moment exists
and the bottom of the beam is in
compression. The tensile reinforcement,
therefore, must be placed near the top of
the beam.

4
CHAPTER 3d. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 8

Doubly Reinforced Beam Analysis


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Condition I: Tension and Compression


Steel Both at Yield Stress
– The basic assumption for the analysis of
doubly reinforced beams are similar to
those for tensile reinforced beams.
– The steel will behave elastically up to the
point where the strain exceeds the yield
strain εy. As a limit f s′= fy when the
compression strain ε s′ ≥ εy.
– If ε s′ < εy, the compression steel stress will
be f s′ = ε s′ Es.

CHAPTER 3d. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 9

Doubly Reinforced Beam Analysis


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Condition I: Tension and Compression


Steel Both at Yield Stress (cont’d)
– If, in a doubly reinforced beam, the tensile
steel ratio ρ is equal to or less than ρb, the
strength of the beam may be approximated
within acceptable limits by disregarding the
compression bars.
– The strength of such a beam will be
controlled be tensile yielding, and the lever
arm of the resisting moment will be little
affected by the presence of comp. bars.

5
CHAPTER 3d. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 10

Doubly Reinforced Beam Analysis


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Condition I: Tension and Compression


Steel Both at Yield Stress (cont’d)
– If the tensile steel ratio ρ is larger than ρb, a
somewhat elaborate analysis is required.
– In Fig. 3a, a rectangular beam cross
section is shown with compression steel As′
placed at distance d ′ from the compression
face and with tensile steel As at the
effective depth d.

CHAPTER 3d. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 11

Doubly Reinforced Beam Analysis


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Condition I: Tension and Compression


Steel Both at Yield Stress (cont’d)
d′ εc = 0.003
0.85 f ′ Figure 3 c
b
N C 2 = As′ f s′
As′ c ε s′
a N C1 = 0.85 f c′ab

N.A
d  a
Z1 =  d −  Z2 = d − d ′
 2
As N T 1 = As1 f y
εs N T 2 = As 2 f y
Cross Section Strain at Ultimate Concrete-Steel Steel-Steel
Moment Couple Couple
(a) (b) (c) (d)

6
CHAPTER 3d. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 12

Doubly Reinforced Beam Analysis


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Condition I: Tension and Compression


Steel Both at Yield Stress (cont’d)
– Notation for Doubly Reinforced Beam:
As′ = total compression steel cross-sectional area
d = effective depth of tension steel
d ′ = depth to centroid of compressive steel from compression fiber
As1 = amount of tension steel used by the concrete-steel couple
As2 = amount of tension steel used by the steel-steel couple
As = total tension steel cross-sectional area (As = As1 + As2)
Mn1 = nominal moment strength of the concrete-steel couple
Mn2 = nominal moment strength of the steel-steel couple
Mn = nominal moment strength of the beam
εs = unit strain at the centroid of the tension steel
ε s′ = unit strain at the centroid of the compressive steel

CHAPTER 3d. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 13

Doubly Reinforced Beam Analysis


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Condition I: Tension and Compression


Steel Both at Yield Stress (cont’d)
– Method of Analysis:
• The total compression will now consist of two
forces
NC1, the compression resisted by the concrete
NC2, the compression resisted by the steel
• For analysis, the total resisting moment of the
beam will be assumed to consist of two parts or two
internal couples: The part due to the resistance of
the compressive concrete and tensile steel and the
part due to the compressive steel and additional
tensile steel.

7
CHAPTER 3d. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 14

Doubly Reinforced Beam Analysis


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Condition I: Tension and Compression


Steel Both at Yield Stress (cont’d)
– The total nominal capacity may be derived
as the sum of the two internal couples,
neglecting the concrete that is displaced by
the compression steel.
– The strength of the steel-steel couple is
given by (see Fig. 3)

M n 2 = NT 2 Z 2 (1)

CHAPTER 3d. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 15

Doubly Reinforced Beam Analysis


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Condition I: Tension and Compression


Steel Both at Yield Stress (cont’d)
d′ εc = 0.003
0.85 f ′ Figure 3 c
b
N C 2 = As′ f s′
As′ c ε s′
a N C1 = 0.85 f c′ab

N.A
d  a
Z1 =  d −  Z2 = d − d ′
 2
As N T 1 = As1 f y
εs N T 2 = As 2 f y
Cross Section Strain at Ultimate Concrete-Steel Steel-Steel
Moment Couple Couple
(a) (b) (c) (d)

8
CHAPTER 3d. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 16

Doubly Reinforced Beam Analysis


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Condition I: Tension and Compression


Steel Both at Yield Stress (cont’d)
M n 2 = As 2 f y (d − d ′) assuming f s = f y
N C 2 = N T 2 ⇒ As′ f s′ = As 2 f y ⇒ As′ = As 2
Therefore,

M n 2 = As′ f y (d − d ′) (2)
– The strength of the concrete-steel couple is
given by
M n1 = N T 1Z1 (3)

CHAPTER 3d. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 17

Doubly Reinforced Beam Analysis


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Condition I: Tension and Compression


Steel Both at Yield Stress (cont’d)
 a
M n1 = As1 f y  d −  assuming f s = f y
 2
As = As1 + As 2 ⇒ As1 = As − As 2
since As 2 = As′ , then
As1 = As − As′
Therefore
 a
M n1 = ( As − As′ ) f y d −  (4)
 2

9
CHAPTER 3d. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 18

Doubly Reinforced Beam Analysis


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Condition I: Tension and Compression


Steel Both at Yield Stress (cont’d)
– Nominal Moment Capacity
From Eqs. 2 and 4, the nominal moment
capacity can be evaluated as

M n = M n1 + M n 2
(5)
 a
= ( As − As′ ) f y d −  + As′ f y (d − d ′)
 2

CHAPTER 3d. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 19

Doubly Reinforced Beam Analysis


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Condition I: Tension and Compression


Steel Both at Yield Stress (cont’d)
– Determination of the Location of Neutral
Axis:
a
c=
β1
N T = N C1 + N C 2
As f y = (0.85 f c′)ab + As′ f y
Therefore,
( As − As′ ) f y As1 f y
a= =
0.85 f c′b 0.85 f c′b

10
CHAPTER 3d. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 20

Doubly Reinforced Beam Analysis


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Condition I: Tension and Compression


Steel Both at Yield Stress (cont’d)
– Location of Neutral Axis c
( As − As′ ) f y As1 f y (6)
a= =
0.85 f c′b 0.85 f c′b
a ( As − As′ ) f y
c= = (7)
β1 0.85β1 f c′b

NOTE: if f c′ ≤ 4,000 psi, then β1 = 0.85, otherwise see next slide

CHAPTER 3d. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 21

Doubly Reinforced Beam Analysis


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Condition I: Tension and Compression


Steel Both at Yield Stress (cont’d)
– The value of β1 may determined by

0.85 for f c′ ≤ 4,000 psi (8)



β1 = 1.05 − 5 ×10- 5 f c′ for 4,000 psi < f c′ ≤ 8,000 psi
0.65 for f c′ > 8,000 psi

11
CHAPTER 3d. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 22

Doubly Reinforced Beam Analysis


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q ACI Code Ductility Requirements


– The ACI Code limitation on ρ applies to
doubly reinforced beams as well as to
singly reinforced beams.
– Steel ratio ρ can be determined from
As1
ρ= (9)
bd
– This value of ρ shall not exceed 0.75ρb as
provided in Table 1 (Table A-5, Textbook)

CHAPTER 3d. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 23

Doubly Reinforced Beam Analysis


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

(Table A-5 Text)


 3 f c′ 200  Recommended Design Values
f c′ (psi )  ≥  ρmax = 0.75 ρb
ρb k (ksi)
 f y f y 
Fy = 40,000 psi
3,000 0.0050 0.0278 0.0135 0.4828
Table 1. 4,000
5,000
0.0050
0.0053
0.0372
0.0436
0.0180
0.0225
0.6438
0.8047
Design Constants 6,000 0.0058 0.0490 0.0270 0.9657
Fy = 50,000 psi
3,000 0.0040 0.0206 0.0108 0.4828
4,000 0.0040 0.0275 0.0144 0.6438
5,000 0.0042 0.0324 0.0180 0.8047
6,000 0.0046 0.0364 0.0216 0.9657
Fy = 60,000 psi
3,000 0.0033 0.0161 0.0090 0.4828
4,000 0.0033 0.0214 0.0120 0.6438
5,000 0.0035 0.0252 0.0150 0.8047
6,000 0.0039 0.0283 0.0180 0.9657
Fy = 75,000 psi
3,000 0.0027 0.0116 0.0072 0.4828
4,000 0.0027 0.0155 0.0096 0.6438
5,000 0.0028 0.0182 0.0120 0.8047
6,000 0.0031 0.0206 0.0144 0.9657

12
CHAPTER 3d. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 24

Doubly Reinforced Beam Analysis


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1
Compute the 1

11′′ 2
practical moment 2
capacity φMn for 2−#10
the beam having #3 stirrup
a cross section ″ 20′′
1
as shown in the 1 clear (typ)
figure. Use f c′= 2 3−#9
3,000 psi and fy = 3−#9
60,000 psi.

CHAPTER 3d. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 25

Doubly Reinforced Beam Analysis


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1 (cont’d)
Determine the values for As′ and As:
From Table 2 (A-2, Textbook),
As′ = area of 2 #10 = 2.54 in 2
As = area of 6 #9 = 6.0 in 2
We assume that all the steel yields:
f s′ = f y and f s = f y
Therefore,
As 2 = As′ = 2.54 in 2
As1 = As − As 2 = 6.0 − 2.54 = 3.46 in 2

13
CHAPTER 3d. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 26

Doubly Reinforced Beam Analysis


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1 (cont’d)
Table 2. Areas of Multiple of Reinforcing Bars (in2)
Number Bar number
of bars #3 #4 $5 #6 #7 #8 #9 #10 #11
1 0.11 0.20 0.31 0.44 0.60 0.79 1.00 1.27 1.56
2 0.22 0.40 0.62 0.88 1.20 1.58 2.00 2.54 3.12
3 0.33 0.60 0.93 1.32 1.80 2.37 3.00 3.81 4.68
4 0.44 0.80 1.24 1.76 2.40 3.16 4.00 5.08 6.24
5 0.55 1.00 1.55 2.20 3.00 3.95 5.00 6.35 7.80
6 0.66 1.20 1.86 2.64 3.60 4.74 6.00 7.62 9.36
7 0.77 1.40 2.17 3.08 4.20 5.53 7.00 8.89 10.92
8 0.88 1.60 2.48 3.52 4.80 6.32 8.00 10.16 12.48
9 0.99 1.80 2.79 3.96 5.40 7.11 9.00 11.43 14.04
10 1.10 2.00 3.10 4.40 6.00 7.90 10.00 12.70 15.60

Table A-2 Textbook

CHAPTER 3d. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 27

Doubly Reinforced Beam Analysis


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1 (cont’d)

d′ εc = 0.003
0.85 f c′ Figure 3
b
N C 2 = As′ f s′
As′ c ε s′
a N C1 = 0.85 f c′ab

N.A
d  a
Z1 =  d −  Z2 = d − d ′
 2
As N T 1 = As1 f y
εs N T 2 = As 2 f y
Cross Section Strain at Ultimate Concrete-Steel Steel-Steel
Moment Couple Couple
(a) (b) (c) (d)

14
CHAPTER 3d. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 28

Doubly Reinforced Beam Analysis


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1 (cont’d)
From Eq. 6 (concrete-steel couple):
( As − As′ ) f y As1 f y 3.46(60)
a= = = = 7.40 in.
0.85 f c′b 0.85 f c′b 0.85(3)(11)

From Eq. 7 (note that f c′< 4,000 psi, thus β1 =


0.85):
a 7.40
c= = = 8.71 in.
β1 0.85

CHAPTER 3d. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 29

Doubly Reinforced Beam Analysis


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1 (cont’d)
Check assumptions for yielding of both the
compressive and tensile steels:
From Fig. 3b:
ε s′ 0.003 0.003(c − d ′) 0.003(8.71 − 2.5)
= ⇒ ε s′ = = = 0.00214
c − d′ c c 8.71
Also
εs 0.003 0.003(d − c ) 0.003(20 − 8.71)
= ⇒ εs = = = 0.00389
d −c c c 8,71
fy 60,000
εy = = = 0.00207 > [ε s′ = 0.00214 and ε s = 0.00389] OK
Es 29 × 106

Therefore, the assumptions are valid

15
CHAPTER 3d. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 30

Doubly Reinforced Beam Analysis


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1 (cont’d)
From Eq. 8:
M n = M n1 + M n 2
 a
= ( As − As′ ) f y d −  + As′ f y (d − d ′)
 2
 7.4 
= 3.46(60 )20 − + 2.54(60 )(20 − 2.5) = 6,050.9 in - k
 2 

6,050.9
Mn = ft - kips = 504.2 ft - kips
12

CHAPTER 3d. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 31

Doubly Reinforced Beam Analysis


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1 (cont’d)
The practical moment capacity is evaluated
as follows:
φM u = 0.9(504.2 ) = 454 ft - kips

Check ductility according to ACI Code:


As1 3.46 From Table 1
ρ= = = 0.0157
bd 11(20)
Since ( ρ = 0.0157) < ( ρ max = 0.0161) OK

16
CHAPTER 3d. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 32

Doubly Reinforced Beam Analysis


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Condition II: Compression Steel Below


Yield Stress
– The preceding equations are valid only if
the compression steel has yielded when
the beam reaches its ultimate strength.
– In many cases, however, such as for wide,
shallow beams reinforced with higher-
strength steels, the yielding of compression
steel may not occur when the beam
reaches its ultimate capacity.

CHAPTER 3d. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 33

Doubly Reinforced Beam Analysis


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Condition II: Compression Steel Below


Yield Stress
– It is therefore necessary to to develop
more generally applicable equations to
account for the possibility that the
compression reinforcement has not yielded
when the doubly reinforced beam fails in
flexure.
– The development of these equations will
be based on
ε s′ < ε y (10)

17
CHAPTER 3d. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 34

Doubly Reinforced Beam Analysis


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Condition II: Compression Steel Below


Yield Stress
– Development of the Equations for
Condition II
• Referring to Fig. 3,
N T = N C1 + N C 2 (11)
As f y = (0.85 f c′)ba + f s′As′
• But (12)
a = β1c
• and  0.003(c − d ′) (13)
f s′ = ε s′ Es =   Es
 c 

CHAPTER 3d. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 35

Doubly Reinforced Beam Analysis


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Condition II: Compression Steel Below


Yield Stress
d′ εc = 0.003
0.85 f ′ Figure 3 c
b
N C 2 = As′ f s′
As′ c ε s′
a N C1 = 0.85 f c′ab

N.A
d  a
Z1 =  d −  Z2 = d − d ′
 2
As N T 1 = As1 f y
εs N T 2 = As 2 f y
Cross Section Strain at Ultimate Concrete-Steel Steel-Steel
Moment Couple Couple
(a) (b) (c) (d)

18
CHAPTER 3d. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 36

Doubly Reinforced Beam Analysis


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Condition II: Compression Steel Below


Yield Stress
• Substituting Eqs 12 and 13 into Eq. 11, yields
 0.003(c − d ′) 
As f y = (0.85 f c′)bβ1c +   Es As′ (14)
 c 
• Multiplying by c, expanding, and rearranging, yield

(0.85 f c′bβ )1 c 2 + (0.003Es As′ − As f y )c − 0.003d ′Es As′ = 0 (15)

• If Es is taken as 29 × 103 ksi, Eq. 15 will take the


following form:

CHAPTER 3d. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 37

Doubly Reinforced Beam Analysis


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Condition II: Compression Steel Below


Yield Stress
The following quadratic equation can be
used to find c when ε s′ < ε y :
(0.85 f c′bβ1 ) c 2 + (87 As′ − As f y ) c − 87d ′As′ = 0 (16)
a b c
Analogous to:
ax 2 + bx + c = 0
− b ± b 2 − 4ac
x=
2a

19
CHAPTER 3d. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 38

Doubly Reinforced Beam Analysis


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 2
Compute the practical

moment φMn for a 2
1
beam having a cross 2

section shown in the 11′′


figure. Use f c′ = 5,000 2−#8
psi and fy = 60,000 psi. #3 stirrup
″ 20′′
1
1 clear (typ)
2

See Textbook for complete 3−#11


solution for this example.

20
Reinforced Concrete Design Fifth Edition
CHAPTER
REINFORCED CONCRETE
BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND
DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS
• A. J. Clark School of Engineering •Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering

Part I – Concrete Design and Analysis

By

3e
FALL 2002 Dr . Ibrahim. Assakkaf

ENCE 355 - Introduction to Structural Design


Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering
University of Maryland, College Park

CHAPTER 3e. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 1
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Design of Doubly


Reinforced Beams for Moment
1. Assume that d = h – 4 in.
2. Establish the total design moment Mu.
3. Check if a doubly reinforced beam is
necessary. From tables for coefficient
of resistance (Table 1, Tables A-7 to
A-11, Textbook), obtain the maximum
k and compute maximum φMn for a
singly reinforced beam:
maximum φM n = φbd 2 k

1
CHAPTER 3e. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 2
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Design of Doubly


Reinforced Beams for Moment
Table A-10 Textbook
Sample Values ρ k
0.0010 0.0595
0.0011 0.0654
0.0012 0.0712
Table 1. 0.0013 0.0771
Coefficient of Resistance 0.0014 0.0830
0.0015 0.0888
0.0016 0.0946
0.0017 0.1005
0.0018 0.1063
0.0019 0.1121
0.0020 0.1179
0.0021 0.1237

CHAPTER 3e. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 3
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Design of Doubly


Reinforced Beams for Moment
4. If φMn < Mu, design the beam as a
doubly reinforced beam. If φMn ≥ Mu,
the beam can be designed as a beam
reinforced with tension steel only.
For a Doubly Reinforced Beam
5. Provide a concrete-steel couple
having the steel ratio
ρ = 0.9 ρ max = 0.9(0.75 ρ b )

2
CHAPTER 3e. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 4
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Design of Doubly


Reinforced Beams for Moment
with this value of ρ, enter the
appropriate table and determine k .
6. Determine the moment capacity of the
concrete-steel couple:
φM n1 = φbd 2 k
Find the steel required for the
concrete-steel couple:
required As1 = ρbd

CHAPTER 3e. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 5
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Design of Doubly


Reinforced Beams for Moment
7. Find the remaining moment that must
be resisted by the steel-steel couple:
required φM n 2 = M u − φM n1
8. Considering the steel-steel couple,
find the required compressive force in
the steel (assume that d ′= 3 in.):
φM n 2
NC 2 =
φ (d − d ′)

3
CHAPTER 3e. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 6
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Design of Doubly


Reinforced Beams for Moment
9. Since NC2 = As′ f s′, compute f s′ so that
may eventually be determined. This
can be accomplished by using the
neutral-axis location of the concrete-
steel couple and checking the strain
in the compression steel with εy. Thus
As1 f y
a=
0.85 f c′b

CHAPTER 3e. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 7
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Design of Doubly


Reinforced Beams for Moment
a fy fy
c= εy = =
β1 Es 29 ×106
0.003(c − d ′)
ε s′ =
c
If ε s′ ≥ εy, the compressive steel has
yielded at the ultimate moment and
f s′ = fy. If ε s′ ≥ εy, then calculate
f s′ = ε s′ Es

4
CHAPTER 3e. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 8
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Design of Doubly


Reinforced Beams for Moment
10. Since NC2 = As′ f s′ ,
NC 2
required As′ =
f s′
11. Determine the required As2:
f s′As′
As 2 =
fy
12. Find the total tension steel required:
As = As1 + As 2

CHAPTER 3e. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 9
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Design of Doubly


Reinforced Beams for Moment
13. Select the compressive steel, As′ .
14. Select the tensile steel, As. Check the
required beam width. Preferably,
place the bars in one layer.
15. Check the actual d and compare it with
the actual d. If the actual d is slightly
in excess of the assumed d, the
design will be slightly conservative (on
the safe side). If the actual d is less

5
CHAPTER 3e. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 10
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Design of Doubly


Reinforced Beams for Moment
than the assumed d, the design may
be on the unconservative side and an
analysis and possibly revision should
be considered.
16. Sketch the detailed design.

CHAPTER 3e. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 11
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Design of Doubly


Reinforced Beams for Moment
Q Example 1
Design a rectangular reinforced concrete
beam to resist a total design moment Mu of
780 ft-kips (this includes the moment due
to the weight of the beam). The beam size
is limited to 15 in. maximum width and 30
in. maximum overall depth. Use f c′ = 3000
psi and fy = 60,000 psi. If compressive steel
is required, make d ′= 2.5 in.

6
CHAPTER 3e. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 12
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Design of Doubly


Reinforced Beams for Moment
Q Example 1 (cont’d)
Assume that d = 30 – 4 = 26 in.
Given:
f c′ = 3 ksi, f y = 60 ksi, and M u = 780 ft - kips
– For singly reinforced beam:
• Max ρ=0.0161 (Table 2, Table A-5, Text)
• Therefore, k = 0.7831 ksi (Table 3, Table A-8,
Text)
0.9(15)(26) (0.7831)
2
φM n1 = φbd k =2
= 595.6 ft - kips
12

CHAPTER 3e. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 13
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Design of Doubly


Reinforced Beams for Moment
Q Example 1 (cont’d) Table A-5 Textbook
 3 f c′ 200  Recommended Design Values
f c′ (psi )  ≥  ρmax = 0.75 ρb
 f y f y  ρb k (ksi)
Fy = 40,000 psi
3,000 0.0050 0.0278 0.0135 0.4828
Table 2 4,000
5,000
0.0050
0.0053
0.0372
0.0436
0.0180
0.0225
0.6438
0.8047
Design Constants 6,000 0.0058 0.0490 0.0270 0.9657
Fy = 50,000 psi
3,000 0.0040 0.0206 0.0108 0.4828
4,000 0.0040 0.0275 0.0144 0.6438
5,000 0.0042 0.0324 0.0180 0.8047
6,000 0.0046 0.0364 0.0216 0.9657
Fy = 60,000 psi
3,000 0.0033 0.0161 0.0090 0.4828
4,000 0.0033 0.0214 0.0120 0.6438
Value used 5,000 0.0035 0.0252 0.0150 0.8047
6,000 0.0039 0.0283 0.0180 0.9657
in example Fy = 75,000 psi
3,000 0.0027 0.0116 0.0072 0.4828
4,000 0.0027 0.0155 0.0096 0.6438
5,000 0.0028 0.0182 0.0120 0.8047
6,000 0.0031 0.0206 0.0144 0.9657

7
CHAPTER 3e. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 14
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Design of Doubly


Reinforced Beams for Moment
Q Example 1 (cont’d)
Table 3. Steel Ratio Versus Coefficient of Resistance
for f c′ = 3,000 psi and fy = 60,000 psi
ρ k ρ k ρ k
0.0082 0.4446 0.0118 0.6098 0.0154 0.7567
0.0083 0.4494 0.0119 0.6141 0.0155 0.7605
0.0084 0.4542 0.0120 0.6184 0.0156 0.7643
0.0085 0.4590 0.0121 0.6227 0.0157 0.7681
0.0086 0.4638 0.0122 0.6270 0.0158 0.7719
0.0087 0.4686 0.0123 0.6312 0.0159 0.7756
0.0088 0.4734 0.0124 0.6355 0.0160 0.7794
0.0089 0.4781 0.0125 0.6398 0.0161 0.7831
0.0090 0.4828 0.0126 0.6440 0.0162 0.7868
0.0091 0.4876 0.0127 0.6482 0.0163 0.7905

Values used in example

CHAPTER 3e. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 15
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Design of Doubly


Reinforced Beams for Moment
Q Example 1 (cont’d)
Since (φMn = 595.6 ft-k) < (Mu = 780 ft-k)
Design the beam as doubly reinforced
For concrete-steel couple:
Use ρ= 0.9 (ρmax) = 0.9 (0.0161) = 0.0145
Therefore,
k = 0.7216 ksi (from Table 4, Table A-8, Text)
and
0.9(15)(26 ) (0.7216 )
2
φM n1 = φbd 2 k = = 549 ft - kips
12

8
CHAPTER 3e. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 16
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Design of Doubly


Reinforced Beams for Moment
Q Example 1 (cont’d)
Table 4. Steel Ratio Versus Coefficient of Resistance
for = 3,000 psi and fy = 60,000 psi
ρ k ρ k ρ k
0.0104 0.5477 0.0140 0.7017 0.0176 0.8374
0.0105 0.5522 0.0141 0.7057 0.0177 0.8409
0.0106 0.5567 0.0142 0.7097 0.0178 0.8444
0.0107 0.5612 0.0143 0.7137 0.0179 0.8479
0.0108 0.5657 0.0144 0.7177 0.0180 0.8514
0.0109 0.5702 0.0145 0.7216 0.0181 0.8548
0.0110 0.5746 0.0146 0.7256 0.0182 0.8583
0.0111 0.5791 0.0147 0.7295 0.0183 0.8617
0.0112 0.5835 0.0148 0.7334 0.0184 0.8651
0.0113 0.5879 0.0149 0.7373 0.0185 0.8685

Values used in example

CHAPTER 3e. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 17
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Design of Doubly


Reinforced Beams for Moment
Q Example 1 (cont’d)
required As1 = ρbd = 0.0145(15)(26) = 5.66 in 2
required φM n 2 = M u − φM n1 = 780 − 549 = 231 ft - kips
d ′ = 2.5 in. (given)
– Therefore, the required force for the steel-
steel couple is
φM n 2 12 × 231
NC 2 = = = 131 kips
φ (d − d ′) 0.9(26 − 2.5)

9
CHAPTER 3e. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 18
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Design of Doubly


Reinforced Beams for Moment
Q Example 1 (cont’d)
– Check compression steel stress:
As1 f y 5.66(60)
a= = = 8.88 in.
0.85 f c′b 0.85(3)(15)
– Thus, c can be calculated as follows:
a 8.88
a = β1c ⇒ c = = = 10.45 in.
β1 0.85 See Eq. 1 (next slide)
– and
0.003(c − d ′) 0.003(10.45 − 2.5)
ε s′ = = = 0.00228
c 10.45

CHAPTER 3e. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 19
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Design of Doubly


Reinforced Beams for Moment
Q Example 1 (cont’d)
– The value of β1 may be determined from the
following equation:

0.85 for f c′ ≤ 4,000 psi



β1 = 1.05 − 5 ×10- 5 f c′ for 4,000 psi < f c′ ≤ 8,000 psi (1)
0.65 for f c′ > 8,000 psi

10
CHAPTER 3e. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 20
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Design of Doubly


Reinforced Beams for Moment
Q Example 1 (cont’d)
– The yield strain of steel can be computed
as
fy 60,000
εy = = = 0.00207
Es 29 ×106

– Since ( ε s′ = 0.00228) > (εy = 0.00207), the


compressive steel has yielded at the
ultimate moment and
f s′ = fy.

CHAPTER 3e. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 21
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Design of Doubly


Reinforced Beams for Moment
Q Example 1 (cont’d)
– Since NC2 = As′ f s′ = As′ fy,
N 131
required As′ = C 2 = = 2.18 in 2
fy 60
– Select steel bars:
• Use 2 #10 ( As′ = 2.54 in2) for compression
rebars.
As = As1 + As 2 = 5.66 + 2.18 = 7.84 in 2
• Use 8 #9 (As = 8.00 in2) for tension rebars in
two layers.

11
CHAPTER 3e. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 22
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Design of Doubly


Reinforced Beams for Moment
Q Example 1 (cont’d)
Table 5. Areas of Multiple of Reinforcing Bars (in2)
Number Bar number
of bars #3 #4 $5 #6 #7 #8 #9 #10 #11
1 0.11 0.20 0.31 0.44 0.60 0.79 1.00 1.27 1.56
2 0.22 0.40 0.62 0.88 1.20 1.58 2.00 2.54 3.12
3 0.33 0.60 0.93 1.32 1.80 2.37 3.00 3.81 4.68
4 0.44 0.80 1.24 1.76 2.40 3.16 4.00 5.08 6.24
5 0.55 1.00 1.55 2.20 3.00 3.95 5.00 6.35 7.80
6 0.66 1.20 1.86 2.64 3.60 4.74 6.00 7.62 9.36
7 0.77 1.40 2.17 3.08 4.20 5.53 7.00 8.89 10.92
8 0.88 1.60 2.48 3.52 4.80 6.32 8.00 10.16 12.48
9 0.99 1.80 2.79 3.96 5.40 7.11 9.00 11.43 14.04
10 1.10 2.00 3.10 4.40 6.00 7.90 10.00 12.70 15.60

Table A-2 Textbook

CHAPTER 3e. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 23
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Design of Doubly


Reinforced Beams for Moment
Q Example 1 (cont’d)
– Check the ACI Code requirements for
minimum width of 4 #9 bars in one layer:
From Table 6, min b = 12.0 in < 15 in. OK
Actual d = 30 − 1.5 − 0.375 − 1.128 − 0.5 = 26.5 in.

Dia. #3 stirrup Dia. #9 bar Half spacing between layers

(actual d = 26.5′′) > (assumed d = 26.0′′) OK

12
CHAPTER 3e. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 24
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Design of Doubly


Reinforced Beams for Moment
Q Example 1 (cont’d)
Table 6. Minimum Required Beam Width, b (in.)
Number Bar number
of bars # 3 and #4 $5 #6 #7 #8 #9 #10 #11
2 6.0 6.0 6.5 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.0
3 7.5 8.0 8.0 8.5 9.0 9.5 10.5 11.0
4 9.0 9.5 10.0 10.5 11.0 12.0 13.0 14.0
5 10.5 11.0 11.5 12.5 13.0 14.0 15.5 16.5
6 12.0 12.5 13.5 14.0 15.0 16.5 18.0 19.5
7 13.5 14.5 15.0 16.0 17.0 18.5 20.5 22.5
8 15.0 16.0 17.0 18.0 19.0 21.0 23.0 25.0
9 16.5 17.5 18.5 20.0 21.0 23.0 25.5 28.0
10 18.0 19.0 20.5 21.5 23.0 25.5 28.0 31.0

Table A-3 Textbook

CHAPTER 3e. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 25
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Design of Doubly


Reinforced Beams for Moment
Table 7. ASTM Standard - English Reinforcing Bars
Diameter Area Weight
Bar Designation
in in2 lb/ft
#3 [#10] 0.375 0.11 0.376
#4 [#13] 0.500 0.20 0.668
#5 [#16] 0.625 0.31 1.043
#6 [#19] 0.750 0.44 1.502
#7 [#22] 0.875 0.60 2.044
#8 [#25] 1.000 0.79 2.670
#9 [#29] 1.128 1.00 3.400
#10 [#32] 1.270 1.27 4.303
#11 [#36] 1.410 1.56 5.313
#14 [#43] 1.693 2.25 7.650
#18 [#57] 2.257 4.00 13.60
Note: Metric designations are in brackets

13
CHAPTER 3e. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 26
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Design of Doubly


Reinforced Beams for Moment
Q Example 1 (cont’d)
1.27
Actual d ′ = 1.5 + 0.375 − = 2.51 in. OK
2
Dia. #3 stirrup
Half Dia. of #10 bar
– Check steel ductility:
As1 8.00 − 2.54
ρ = = 0.0137
bd 15(26.5)

(ρ = 0.0137 ) < (ρ max = 0.0161) OK

CHAPTER 3e. R/C BEAMS: T-BEAMS AND DOUBLY REINFORCED BEAMS Slide No. 27
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Procedure for Design of Doubly


Reinforced Beams for Moment
Q Example 1 (cont’d)
Final Detailed Sketch:

b
2−#10 bars

1
#3 stirrup 1
2
CLR (Typ.)

30′′

4−#9 bars 1′′ CLR


4−#9 bars

14
Reinforced Concrete Design Fifth Edition
CHAPTER

SHEAR IN BEAMS
• A. J. Clark School of Engineering •Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering

Part I – Concrete Design and Analysis

By

4a
FALL 2002 Dr . Ibrahim. Assakkaf

ENCE 355 - Introduction to Structural Design


Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering
University of Maryland, College Park

CHAPTER 4a. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 1

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q The previous chapters dealt with the


flexural strength of beams.
Q Beams must also have an adequate
safety margin against other types of
failure such as shear, which may be
more dangerous than flexural failure.
Q The shear forces create additional
tensile stresses that must be
considered.

1
CHAPTER 4a. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 2

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Shear Failure
– Shear failure of reinforced concrete beam,
more properly called “diagonal tension
failure”, is difficult to predict accurately.
– In spite of many years of experimental
research and the use of highly
sophisticated computational tools, it is not
fully understood.
– If a beam without properly designed for
shear reinforcement is overloaded to
failure, shear collapse is likely to occur
suddenly.

CHAPTER 4a. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 3

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Figure 1. Shear Failure (Nilson, 1997)

(a) Overall view, (b) detail near right support.

2
CHAPTER 4a. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 4

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Shear Failure (cont’d)


– Figure 1 shows a shear-critical beam
tested under point loading.
– With no shear reinforcement provided, the
member failed immediately upon formation
of the critical crack in the high-shear region
near the right support.

CHAPTER 4a. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 5

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Shear Failure (cont’d)

When are the shearing effects so large that


they cannot be ignored as a design
consideration?
– It is somehow difficult to answer this
question.
– Probably the best way to begin answering
this question is to try to approximate the
shear stresses on the cross section of the
beam.

3
CHAPTER 4a. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 6

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Shear Failure (cont’d)


– Suppose that a beam is constructed by
stacking several slabs or planks on top of
another without fastening them together.
– Also suppose this beam is loaded in a
direction normal to the surface of these
slabs.
– When a bending load is applied, the stack
will deform as shown in Fig. 2a.
– Since the slabs were free to slide on one
one another, the ends do not remain even
but staggered.

CHAPTER 4a. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 7

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Shear Failure (cont’d)

(a) Unloaded Stack of Slabs (b) Unglued Slabs loaded

Figure 2a

4
CHAPTER 4a. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 8

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Shear Failure (cont’d)


– Each of the slabs behaves as independent
beam, and the total resistance to bending of
n slabs is approximately n times the
resistance of one slab alone.
– If the slabs of Fig. 2b is fastened or glued,
then the staggering or relative longitudinal
movement of slabs would disappear under
the action of the force. However, shear
forces will develop between the slabs.
– In this case, the stack of slabs will act as a
solid beam.

CHAPTER 4a. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 9

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Shear Failure (cont’d)

(c) Glued Slabs Unloaded (d) Glued Slabs loaded

Figure 2b

5
CHAPTER 4a. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 10

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Shear Failure (cont’d)


– The fact that this solid beam does not
exhibit this relative movement of
longitudinal elements after the slabs are
glued indicates the presence of shearing
stresses on longitudinal planes.
– Evaluation of these shearing stresses will
be discussed in the next couple of
viewgraphs.

CHAPTER 4a. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 11

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Theoretical Background
– The concept of stresses acting in
homogeneous beams are usually covered
in various textbooks of mechanics of
materials (strength of materials).
– It can be shown that when the material is
elastic, shear stresses can be computed
from
VQ (1)
v=
Ib
v = shear stress Q = statical moment of area about N.A.
V = external shear force b = width of the cross section
I = moment of inertia about neutral axis

6
CHAPTER 4a. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 12

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Theoretical Background
– Also, when the material is elastic, bending
stresses can be computed from

Mc
f = (2)
I
f = bending stress
M = external or applied moment
c = the distance from the neutral axis to out fiber of
the cross section
I = moment of inertia of the cross section about N.A.

CHAPTER 4a. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 13

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Theoretical Background
– All points in the length of the beam, where
the shear and bending moment are not
zero, and at locations other than the
extreme fiber or neutral axis, are subject to
both shearing stresses and bending
stresses.
– The combination of these stresses
produces maximum normal and shearing
stresses in a specific plane inclined with
respect to the axis of the beam.

7
CHAPTER 4a. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 14

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Theoretical Background
– The distributions of the bending and shear
stresses acting individually are shown in
Figs. 3, 4, 5, and 6. Mc
y P f =
I Centroidal axis
w
Neutral axis

FC c
c yC c
x
y
FT dA dy

R Vr
Figure 3. Bending Stress

CHAPTER 4a. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 15

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Theoretical Background

Figure 4. Bending Stress


Mc
f =
I

8
CHAPTER 4a. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 16

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Theoretical Background
Figure 5. Vertical Shearing Stress

VQ
v=
Ib

Max Stress
V
N.A

CHAPTER 4a. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 17

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Theoretical Background
Figure 6. Vertical Shearing Stress

VQ
v=
Ib

9
CHAPTER 4a. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 18

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Principal Planes
– The combination of bending moment and
shearing stresses is of such a nature that
maximum normal and shearing shearing
stresses at a point in a beam exist on
planes that are inclined with the axis of the
beam.
– These planes are commonly called
principal planes, and the stresses that act
on them are referred to as principal
stresses.

CHAPTER 4a. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 19

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Principal Planes
– Plane State of Stress σy
σy
τ yx
τ yz τ xy τ xy
τ zy σx σx
τ zx σx
τ xz τ xy
σz
τ yx
σy

10
CHAPTER 4a. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 20

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Principal Planes
– Plane State of Stress
σy

Components: τ yx
A
τ xy
Normal Stress σx θ
σx σx
Normal Stress σy
Shearing Stress τxy τ xy A

Shearing Stress τyx


τ yx
σy
τ xy = τ yx

CHAPTER 4a. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 21

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Principal Stresses
– The principal stresses in a beam subjected
to shear and bending may be computed
using the following equation:

f f2
f pr = ± + v2 (3)
2 4
fpr = principal stress
f = bending stress computed from Eq. 2
v = shearing stress computed from Eq. 1

11
CHAPTER 4a. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 22

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Orientation Principal Planes


– The orientation of the principal planes may
be calculated using the following equation:

1  2v 
α= tan −1   (4)
2  f 
– Note that at the neutral axis of the beam,
the principal stresses will occur at a 450
angle.

CHAPTER 4a. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 23

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q State of Stress at the Neutral Axis of a


Homogeneous Beam
vyx
w vxy
N.A.
vxy
vyx
(a) Beam under Uniform Loading (b) Stresses on Unit Element

Figure 7. Shear Stress Relationship

12
CHAPTER 4a. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 24

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q State of Stress at the Neutral Axis of a


Homogeneous Beam
– Diagonal Tension Figure 8
vyx D A vyx

vxy vxy

vxy vxy
vyx vyx
B
C This plane is subject This plane is subject
to tension to compression

CHAPTER 4a. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 25

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q State of Stress at the Neutral Axis of a


Homogeneous Beam
– Diagonal Tension
• Plane A-B is subjected to compression
• While Plane C-D is subjected to tension.
• The tension in Plane C-D is historically called
“diagonal tension”.
• Note that concrete is strong in compression but
weak in tension, and there is a tendency for
concrete to crack on the plane subject to
tension.
• When the tensile stresses are so high, it is
necessary to provide reinforcement.

13
CHAPTER 4a. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 26

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Diagonal Tension Failure


– In the beams with which we are concerned,
where the length over which a shear failure
could occur (the shear span) is in excess
of approximately three times the effective
depth, the diagonal tension failure would
be the mode of failure in shear.
– Such a failure is shown in Figs. 1 and 8.
– For longer shear spans in plain concrete
beams, cracks due to flexural tensile
stresses would occur long before cracks
due to diagonal tension.

CHAPTER 4a. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 27

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Diagonal Tension Failure


Shear Span
Portion of span in which
Shear stress is high

Figure 8. Typical Diagonal Tension Failure

14
CHAPTER 4a. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 28

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Figure 1. Shear Failure (Nilson, 1997)

(a) Overall view, (b) detail near right support.

CHAPTER 4a. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 29

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Basis of ACI Design for Shear


– The ACI provides design guidelines for
shear reinforcement based on the vertical
shear force Vu that develops at any given
cross section of a member.
– Although it is really the diagonal tension for
which shear reinforcing must be provided,
diagonal tensile forces (or stresses) are not
calculated.
– Traditionally, vertical shear force has been
taken to be good indicator of diagonal
tension present.

15
CHAPTER 4a. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 30
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Shear Reinforcement Design


Requirements
Q Web Reinforcement
– The basic rationale for the design of the
shear reinforcement, or web reinforcement
as it usually called in beams, is to provide
steel to cross the diagonal tension cracks
and subsequently keep them from opening.
– In reference to Fig. 8, it is seen that the
web reinforcement may take several forms
such as:

CHAPTER 4a. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 31


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Shear Reinforcement Design


Requirements
Q Web Reinforcement (cont’d)
1. Vertical stirrups (see Fig. 9)
2. Inclined or diagonal stirrups
3. The main reinforcement bent at ends to
act as inclined stirrups (see Fig. 10).
– The most common form of web
reinforcement used is the vertical stirrup.
– This reinforcement appreciably increases
the ultimate shear capacity of a bending
member.

16
CHAPTER 4a. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 32
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Shear Reinforcement Design


Requirements
Q Web Reinforcement (cont’d)
– Vertical Stirrups
Vertical Stirrups

L L
2 2

Figure 9. Types of Web Reinforcement

CHAPTER 4a. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 33


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Shear Reinforcement Design


Requirements
Q Web Reinforcement (cont’d)
– Bent-up Longitudinal Bars
Bent-up bar

L L
2 2

Figure 9. Type of Web Reinforcement

17
CHAPTER 4a. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 34
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Shear Reinforcement Design


Requirements
Q ACI Code Provisions for Shear
Reinforcement
For member that are subject to shear and
flexure only, the amount of shear force that
the concrete (unreinforced for shear)can
resist is

Vc = 2 f c′bw d (5)

Note, for rectangular beam bw = b

CHAPTER 4a. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 35


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Shear Reinforcement Design


Requirements
Q ACI Code Provisions for Shear
Reinforcement
– The design shear force Vu results from the
application of factored loads.
– Values of Vu are most conveniently
determined using a typical shear force
diagram.
– Theoretically, no web reinforcement is
required if
Vu ≤ φVc (6)

18
CHAPTER 4a. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 36
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Shear Reinforcement Design


Requirements
Table 1. Strength Reduction Factors
Type of Loading φ
Bending 0.90
Shear and Torsion 0.85
Compression members (spirally reinforced) 0.75
Compression Members (tied) 0.70
Bearing on Concrete 0.70

CHAPTER 4a. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 37


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Shear Reinforcement Design


Requirements
Q ACI Code Provisions for Shear
Reinforcement
– However, the code requires that a minimum
area of shear reinforcement be provided in
all reinforced concrete flexural members
when Vu > ½ φVc, except as follows:
• In slabs and footings
• In concrete joist construction as defined in the code.
• In beams with a total depth of less than 10 in., 2 ½
times the flange thickness, or one-half the width of the
web, whichever is greater.

19
CHAPTER 4a. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 38
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Shear Reinforcement Design


Requirements
Q ACI Code Provisions for Shear
Reinforcement
– In cases where shear reinforcement is
required for strength or because Vu > ½
φVc, the minimum area of shear
reinforcement shall be computed from

50bw s
Av = (7)
fy

CHAPTER 4a. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 39


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Shear Reinforcement Design


Requirements
Q ACI Code Provisions for Shear
Reinforcement
Where
Av = total cross-sectional area of web reinforcement within
a distance s, for single loop stirrups, Av = 2As
As = cross-sectional area of the stirrup bar (in2)
bw = web width = b for rectangular section (in.)
s = center-to-center spacing of shear reinforcement in a
direction parallel to the longitudinal reinforcement (in.)
fy = yield strength of web reinforcement steel (psi)

20
CHAPTER 4a. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 40
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Shear Reinforcement Design


Requirements
Q ACI Code Provisions for Shear
Reinforcement

Figure 10.
Isometric section
showing stirrups
partially exposed

CHAPTER 4a. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 41


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Shear Reinforcement Design


Requirements
Q Example
A reinforced concrete beam of rectangular
cross section shown in the figure is
reinforced for moment only (no shear
reinforcement). Beam width b = 18 in., d =
10.25 in., and the reinforcing is five No. 4
bars. Calculate the maximum factored
shear force Vu permitted on the member by
the ACI Code. Use = 4,000 psi, and fy =
60,000 psi.

21
CHAPTER 4a. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 42
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Shear Reinforcement Design


Requirements
Q Example (cont’d)
Since no shear reinforcement 10.25′′
Is provided, the ACI Code
5− #4
Requires that
18′′
1
maximum Vu = φVc
2
1
(
= φ 2 f c′bw d
2
)
1
( )
= (0.85)(2 ) 4000 (18)(10.25) = 9918 lb
2

22
Reinforced Concrete Design Fifth Edition
CHAPTER

SHEAR IN BEAMS
• A. J. Clark School of Engineering •Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering

Part I – Concrete Design and Analysis

By

4b
FALL 2002 Dr . Ibrahim. Assakkaf

ENCE 355 - Introduction to Structural Design


Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering
University of Maryland, College Park

CHAPTER 4b. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 1

Shear Analysis Procedure


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q The shear analysis procedure involves


the following:
– Checking the shear strength in an existing
member
– Verifying that the various ACI code
requirements have been satisfied and met.
Q Note that the member may reinforced or
plain.

1
CHAPTER 4b. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 2

Shear Analysis Procedure


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1
A reinforced concrete beam of rectangular
cross section shown is reinforced with
seven No. 6 bars in a single layer. Beam
width b = 18 in., d = 33 in., single-loop No.
3 stirrups are placed 12 in. on center, and
typical cover is 1 ½ in. Find Vc, Vs, and the
maximum factored shear force permitted
on this member. Use = 4,000 psi and fy
= 60,000 psi.

CHAPTER 4b. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 3

Shear Analysis Procedure


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1 (cont’d)
18′′


1
#3 @ 12′′ stirrup 1
2
COV.

33′′

7−#6 bars

2
CHAPTER 4b. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 4

Shear Analysis Procedure


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1 (cont’d)
– The force that can be resisted by concrete
alone is 2 4,000 (18)(33)
Vc = 2 f c′bw d = = 75.1 kips
1000
– The nominal shear force provided by the
steel is A f d (2 × 0.11)(60)(33)
V = v y = s = 36.3 kips
s 12
– The maximum factored shear force is
maximum Vu = φVc + φVs = 0.85(75.1 + 36.3)

= 94.7 kips

CHAPTER 4b. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 5


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Shear Reinforcement Design


Requirements
Q ACI Code Provisions for Shear Design
– According to the ACI Code, the design of
beams for shear is based on the following
relation:

φVn ≥ Vu (1)
Where
φ = strength reduction factor (= 0.85 for shear)
Vn = Vc + Vs
Vs = nominal shear strength provided by reinforcement
Av f y d
= for inclined stirrups (2)
s

3
CHAPTER 4b. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 6
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Shear Reinforcement Design


Requirements
Q ACI Code Provisions for Shear Design
– Symbols
Av = total cross-sectional area of web reinforcement within
a distance s, for single loop stirrups, Av = 2As
As = cross-sectional area of the stirrup bar (in2)
bw = web width = b for rectangular section (in.)
s = center-to-center spacing of shear reinforcement in a
direction parallel to the longitudinal reinforcement (in.)
fy = yield strength of web reinforcement steel (psi)

CHAPTER 4b. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 7


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Shear Reinforcement Design


Requirements
Q ACI Code Provisions for Shear Design
– For inclined stirrups, the expression for
nominal shear strength provided by
reinforcement is
Av f y d (sin α + cos α ) (3)
Vs =
s
– For α = 45 , the expression takes the form
0

1.414 Av f y d
Vs = (4)
s

4
CHAPTER 4b. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 8
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Shear Reinforcement Design


Requirements
Q ACI Code Provisions for Shear Design
– The design for stirrup spacing can be
determined from
Av f y d
required s = (for vertical stirrups) (5)
Vs
and
1.414 Av f y d
required s =
Vs
(for 450 stirrups) (6)
where
Vu − φVc
Vs = (7)
φ

CHAPTER 4b. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 9


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Shear Reinforcement Design


Requirements
Q ACI Code Provisions for Shear Design
– According to the ACI Code, the maximum
spacing of stirrups is the smallest value of
Av f y
smax =
50bw
d (8)
smax =
2
smax = 24 in.

If Vs exceeds 4 f c′bw d , the maximum spacing must


not exceed d/4 or 12 in.

5
CHAPTER 4b. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 10
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Shear Reinforcement Design


Requirements
Q ACI Code Provisions for Shear Design
– It is not usually good practice to space
vertical stirrups closer than 4 in.
– It is generally economical and practical to
compute spacing required at several
sections and to place stirrups accordingly
in groups of varying spacing. Spacing
values should be made to not less than 1-
in. increments.

CHAPTER 4b. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 11


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Shear Reinforcement Design


Requirements
Q ACI Code Provisions for Shear Design
– Critical Section
• The maximum shear usually occurs in this
section near the support.
• For stirrup design, the section located a
distance d from the face of the support is called
the “critical section”
• Sections located less than a distance d from
the face of the support may be designed for the
same Vu as that of the critical section.

6
CHAPTER 4b. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 12
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Shear Reinforcement Design


Requirements
Q ACI Code Provisions for Shear Design
– Critical Section

Critical Section

d
L
Figure 1

CHAPTER 4b. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 13


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Shear Reinforcement Design


Requirements
Q ACI Code Provisions for Shear Design
– Critical Section (cont’d)
• The stirrup spacing should be constant from the
critical section back to the face of the support
based on the spacing requirements at the
critical section.
• The first stirrup should be placed at a maximum
distance of s/2 from the face of the support,
where s equals the immediately adjacent
required spacing (a distance of 2 in. is
commonly used.

7
CHAPTER 4b. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 14
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Stirrup Design Procedure


Q The design of stirrups for shear
reinforcement involves the
determination of stirrup size and
spacing pattern.
Q A general procedure is as follows:
1. Determine the shear values based on
clear span and draw a shear diagram for
Vu.
2. Determine if stirrups are required.

CHAPTER 4b. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 15


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Stirrup Design Procedure


3. Determine the length of span over which
stirrups are required.
4. On the Vu diagram, determine the area
representing “required φVs.” This will
display the required strength of the
stirrups to be provided.
5. Select the size of the stirrups. Find the
spacing required at the critical section ( a
distance d from the face of the support.

8
CHAPTER 4b. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 16
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Stirrup Design Procedure


6. Establish the ACI Code maximum
spacing requirements.
7. Determine the spacing requirements
based on shear strength to be furnished
by web reinforcing.
8. Establish the spacing pattern and show
detailed sketches.

CHAPTER 4b. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 17


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Stirrup Design Procedure

Q Example 2
A continuous reinforced concrete beam
shown in the figure is 15 in. wide and has
an effective depth of 31 in. The factored
loads are shown, and the factored uniform
load includes the weight of the beam.
Design the web reinforcement if f c′= 4000
psi and fy = 60,000 psi.

9
CHAPTER 4b. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 18
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Stirrup Design Procedure


Q Example 2 (cont’d)

31′′

100 k 100 k
As
5′ - 0′′ 5′ - 0′′ 5′ - 0′′
15′′
A wu = 1.0 k/ft
Section A-A

15′ − 0′′ clear span

CHAPTER 4b. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 19


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Stirrup Design Procedure


2(100) + 1(15)
Q Example 2 (cont’d) R1 = R2 =
2
= 107.5 k

– Establish the shear force diagram for Vu:

100 k 100 k
5′ - 0′′ 5′ - 0′′ 5′ - 0′′
wu = 1.0 k/ft

107.5 k 107.5 k

10
CHAPTER 4b. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 20
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf
100 k 100 k
Example 2 (cont’d) 5′ - 0′′ 5′ - 0′′ 5′ - 0′′
wu = 1.0 k/ft

107.5 k 107.5 k

107.5
102.5

+ 2.5
Vu (kips)
2.5
-
107.5

See Fig. 2 for enlargement

CHAPTER 4b. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 21


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf
100 k 100 k
Example 2 (cont’d) 5′ - 0′′ 5′ - 0′′ 5′ - 0′′
wu = 1.0 k/ft

107.5 k 107.5 k
M
x Vu = 107.5 − x for 0 ≤ x ≤ 5
V d = 31′′ = 2.58′
100 k Vu* = Vu (2.58) = 107.5 − 2.58 = 104.9 k
107.5 k M

x
V
Vu = 107.5 − 100 − x for 5 ≤ x ≤ 10
107.5 k

11
CHAPTER 4b. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 22
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Stirrup Design Procedure

Q Example 2 (cont’d)
– Because of the symmetry, we will focus on
the left half of the shear diagram as shown
in Fig. 2.
– Determine if stirrups required:
0.85(2) 4,000 (15)(31)
φVc = φ 2 f c′bw d = = 50 kips
100
1 1
φVc = (50) = 25 kips
2 2

Since ( Vu* =104.9 k) > (1/2 φVc = 25 k), stirrups are required.

CHAPTER 4b. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 23


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Stirrup Design Procedure


Q Example 2 (cont’d) Figure 2
Sym.
107.5
* 104.9 CL
Vu*
102.5
required φVs

φVc 50

1
φVc 25
2

Vu
*
(kips) 0
d = 31′′ = 2.58′
5.0′ 2.5′

12
CHAPTER 4b. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 24
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Stirrup Design Procedure


Q Example 2 (cont’d)
– Stirrups are required to the point where
1
Vu = φVc = 25 kips
2

From Fig. 2, this point is located at the first


concentrated load and it is at distance 5 ft from
the face of the support.
– Determine the “required φVs” on the Vu diagram:
required φVs = max Vu − φVc − wx
= 107.5 − 50 − x
required φVs = 57.5 − x for 2.58 ≤ x ≤ 5

CHAPTER 4b. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 25


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Stirrup Design Procedure


Q Example 2 (cont’d)
– Assume No. 3 vertical stirrups (Av = 0.22 in2):
φAy f y d 0.85(0.22 )(60 )(31)
required s * = = = 6.3 in.
required φVs* 104.9 − 50
use 6 in.

– Establish ACI Code maximum spacing


requirements:
4 4000 (15)(31)
4 f c′bw d = = 117.6 kips
1000
φV * 104.9 − 50
Vs* = s = = 64.6 kips
φ 0.85

13
CHAPTER 4b. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 26
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Stirrup Design Procedure


Q Example 2 (cont’d)
– Since 64.6 kips < 117.6 kips, the maximum
spacing shall be the smallest of the
following values (see Eq. 8):
Av f y 0.22(60,000 )
smax = = = 17.6 in.
50bw 50(15)
d 31
smax = = = 15.5 in. controls
2 2
smax = 24 in.

Therefore, use a maximum spacing of 15 in.

CHAPTER 4b. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 27


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Stirrup Design Procedure


Q Example 2 (cont’d)
– Determine the spacing requirements
between the critical section and the first
concentrated load:
φAy f y d 0.85(0.22 )(60 )(31)
required s = =
required φVs 57.5 − x

– The results of applying above equation for


values of x range from 3 to 5 are tabulated
as shown
x (ft) Required s (in)
3 6.4
4 6.5
5 6.6

14
CHAPTER 4b. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 28
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Stirrup Design Procedure


Q Example 2 (cont’d)
– Since no stirrups are required in the
distance between the first concentrated
load , it is clear that the maximum spacing
of 15 in. need not be used in that distance.
– A spacing of 6 in. will be used between the
face of the support and the concentrated
load.
– The center part of the beam will be
reinforced with stirrups at a spacing slightly
less than the maximum spacing of 15 in.

CHAPTER 4b. SHEAR IN BEAMS Slide No. 29


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Stirrup Design Procedure


Q Example 2 (cont’d)
Final Sketch for Shear Reinforcement:
Sym.
CL
7′ − 6′′

10 spaces @ 6′′ = 5′

3′′ ″
″ 1
1 1′ − 1
1′ − 1 2
2

15
Reinforced Concrete Design Fifth Edition
CHAPTER
DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES,
AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR
CUTOFFS
• A. J. Clark School of Engineering •Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering

Part I – Concrete Design and Analysis

By

5a
FALL 2002 Dr . Ibrahim. Assakkaf

ENCE 355 - Introduction to Structural Design


Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering
University of Maryland, College Park

CHAPTER 5a. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 1

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q If the reinforced concrete beam shown


in Fig. 1 were constructed using plain
round reinforcing bars, and in addition, if
those bars were to be greased or
otherwise lubricated before the concrete
were poured, the beam would be as
strong as it was made of plain concrete,
without reinforcement.

1
CHAPTER 5a. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 2

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Figure. 1. Bond Stresses due to Flexure


Concrete

(a)
Reinforcing bar (c) Bond forces acting on concrete
End slip
P

(d) Bond forces acting on steel


(b) Unrestrained slip between concrete
and steel

CHAPTER 5a. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 3

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q If a load is applied as shown Fig. 1b, the


bars would tend to maintain its original
length as the beam deflects.
Q The bars would slip longitudinally with
respect to adjacent concrete, which
would experience tensile strain due to
flexure.
Q The assumption that the strain in an
embedded reinforcing bar is the same
as that in surrounding concrete, would

2
CHAPTER 5a. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 4

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Not be valid.
Q In order for reinforced concrete to
behave as intended, it is essential that
“bond forces” be developed on the
interface between concrete and steel,
such as to prevent significant slip from
occurring at the interface.
Q It is through the action of these interface
bond forces that the slip of Fig. 5b is
prevented.

CHAPTER 5a. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 5

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q The assumptions for the design of


reinforced concrete include:
1. Perfect bonding between the concrete
and steel exist, and
2. No slippage occur.
Q Based on these assumptions, it
follows that some form of bond stress
exists at the contact surface between
the concrete and steel bars.

3
CHAPTER 5a. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 6

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q In beams, this bond stress is caused by


the change in bending moment along
the length of the beam and the
accompanying change in the tensile
stress in the bars (flexural bond).
Q The actual distribution of bond stresses
along the reinforcing steel is highly
complex, due mainly to the presence of
concrete cracks.

CHAPTER 5a. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 7

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Large local variations in bond stress are


caused by flexural and diagonal cracks.
Q High bond stresses have been
measured adjacent to these cracks.
Q The high bond stress may result in:
– Small local slips adjacent to the crack
– Increased deflection
Q In general, this is harmless as long as
failure does not propagate all along the
bar with complete loss of bond.

4
CHAPTER 5a. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 8

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Development Length
– End anchorage may be considered reliable
if the bar is embedded into concrete a
prescribed distance known as the
“development length” of the bar.
– In a beam, if the the actual extended length
of the bar is equal or greater than this
required development length, then no bond
failure will occur.

CHAPTER 5a. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 9

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Development Length
Max moment is at a
P P

l a

Figure 2. Development length


l should be at least equal to lb

5
CHAPTER 5a. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 10

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Need for Development Length


Figure 3. Continuous Beam
w

A C
B

Moment
+ + +
Diagram - -
l ≥ ld

CHAPTER 5a. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 11

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Anchorages Versus Development


Length
If the actual available length is inadequate
for full development, special anchorages
,such as hooks, must be provided to
ensure adequate strength.

6
CHAPTER 5a. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 12

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q ACI Code
– The provisions of the ACI Code are
directed toward providing adequate length
of embedment, past the location at which
the bar is fully stressed, which will ensure
development of the full strength of the bar.
– Therefore, the current method based on
ACI disregard high localized bond stress
even though it may result in localized slip
between steel and concrete adjacent to the
cracks.

CHAPTER 5a. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 13

Development Length: Tension Bars


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Methods for Determining the Development


Length, ld
– The ACI allows the determination of the
development length by two methods:
1. Tabular criteria (ACI Section 12.2.2)
2. General equation (ACI Section 12.2.3)
– In either case, ld shall not be less than 12 in.
– The general equation of the ACI Code offers
a simple approach that allows the user to see
the effect of all variables controlling the
development length.

7
CHAPTER 5a. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 14

Development Length: Tension Bars


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Methods for Determining the


Development Length, ld (cont’d)
This equation (ACI Eq. 12-1) is provided in
Section 12.2.3 of the ACI Code, and it is as
follows:
 
 
3  f y   αβγλ  (1)
ld = db
40  f c′    c + ktr  
   
  d b  

CHAPTER 5a. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 15

Development Length: Tension Bars


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Notations of Eq. 1:
(c + ktr)/db: shall not be taken greater than 2.5
ld = development length (in.)
fy = yield strength of nonprestressed reinforcement (psi)
f c′= compressive strength of concrete (psi); the value of
f c′ shall not exceed 100 psi (ACI Code, Section 12.1.2)
db = nominal diameter of bar or wire (in.)

8
CHAPTER 5a. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 16

Development Length: Tension Bars


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Comments for Eq. 1:


1. α is a reinforcement location factor that accounts for
the position of the reinforcement in freshly place
concrete.
α = 1.3 (ACI Code, Section 12.2.4) where horizontal
reinforcement is so placed that more than 12 in. of
fresh concrete is cast in member below the
development length or splice.
α = 1.0 for other reinforcement.
2. β is a coating factor reflecting the effects of epoxy
coating.
For epoxy-coated reinforcement having cover less
than 3db or clear spacing between bars less than 6db,
use β = 1.5

CHAPTER 5a. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 17

Development Length: Tension Bars


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Comments for Eq. 1 (cont’d):


For all other conditions, use β = 1.2
For uncoated reinforcement, use β = 1.0
The product of α and β need not be taken greater than
1.7 (ACI Code, Section 12.2.4)
3. γ is a reinforcement size factor.
Where No. 6 and smaller bars are used, γ = 0.8
Where No. 7 and larger bars used, γ = 0.1
4. λ is a lightweight-aggregate concrete factor.
For lightweight-aggregate concrete when the average
splitting tensile strength fct is not specified, use λ = 1.3

9
CHAPTER 5a. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 18

Development Length: Tension Bars


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Comments for Eq. 1 (cont’d):


When fct is specified, use
f c′
λ = 6.7 ≥ 1.0
f ct
When normal-weight concrete is used, λ = 1.0 (ACI
Code, Section 12.2.4)

5. c represents a spacing or cover dimension (in.)


The value of c will be the smaller of either the distance
from the center of the bar to the nearest concrete cover
(surface) or one-half the center-to-center spacing of the
bars being developed (spacing).

CHAPTER 5a. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 19

Development Length: Tension Bars


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Comments for Eq. 1 (cont’d):


The bar spacing will be the actual center-to-center
spacing between the bars if adjacent bars are all being
developed at the same location. If, however, an
adjacent bar has been developed at another location,
the spacing to be used will be greater than the actual
spacing to the adjacent bar.
Note in Fig. 4 that the spacing for bars Y may be
taken the same as for bars X, since bars Y are
developed in length AB, whereas bars X are
developed at a location other than AB.

10
CHAPTER 5a. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 20

Development Length: Tension Bars


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Comments for Eq. 1 (cont’d): Figure. 4


A Bars Y B Bars X

s
s

Single Layer Plan View


Bars Y Bars X (continuous) Bars Y
A

A Elevation View Section A-A


ld

CHAPTER 5a. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 21

Development Length: Tension Bars


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Comments for Eq. 1 (cont’d):


6. The transverse reinforcement index Ktr is to be calculated
from
Atr f yt
K tr =
1500sn
where
Atr = total cross-sectional area of all transverse
reinforcement that is within the spacing s and that
crosses the potential plane of splitting through the
reinforcement being developed (in2)
fyt = yield strength of transverse reinforcement (psi)

11
CHAPTER 5a. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 22

Development Length: Tension Bars


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Comments for Eq. 1 (cont’d):


s = maximum center-to-center spacing of transverse
reinforcement within the development length ld (in.)
n = number of bars or wires being developed along the
plane of splitting.

CHAPTER 5a. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 23

Development Length: Tension Bars


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Reduction in Development Length


– A reduction in the development length ld is
permitted where reinforcement is in excess
of that required by analysis (except where
anchorage or development for fy is
specifically required or where the design
includes provisions for seismic
considerations).
– The reduction factor KER is given by
As required
K ER =
As provided
(2)

12
CHAPTER 5a. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 24

Procedure for Calculation of ld


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

1. Determine multiplying factors (use 1.0


unless otherwise determined).
a. Use α = 1.3 for top reinforcement, when
applicable.
b. Coating factor β applies to epoxy-coated bars.
Determine cover and clear spacing as
multiples of db. Use β = 1.5 if cover < 3db or
clear space < 6db. Use β = 1.2 otherwise.
c. Use γ = 0.8 for No. 6 bars and smaller.
d. Use λ = 1.3 for lightweight concrete with fct not
specified. Use f c′
λ = 6.7 ≥ 1.0 if f ct specified.
f ct

CHAPTER 5a. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 25

Procedure for Calculation of ld


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

2. Check αβ ≤ 1.7.
3. Determine c, the smaller of cover or
half-spacing (both referenced to the
center of the bar).
4. Calculate
Atr f y
K tr = , or use K tr = 0 (conservative)
1500 sn
5. Check c + K tr
≤ 2.5
db

13
CHAPTER 5a. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 26

Procedure for Calculation of ld


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

6. Calculate KER if applicable:


As required
K ER =
As provided
7. Calculate ld from Eq. 1 (ACI Code Eq.
12-1):
 
 
3  f y   αβγλ
 d
ld =
40  f c′    c + ktr 
b

   
  d b  

CHAPTER 5a. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 27

Procedure for Calculation of ld


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1
Calculate the required development length
ld into the beam for the negative moment
steel shown so as to develop the tensile
strength of the steel at the face of the
column. Required As = 2.75 in2, f c′ =4,000
psi, and fy = 60,000 psi. Assume normal-
weight concrete.

14
CHAPTER 5a. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 28

Procedure for Calculation of ld


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1 (cont’d)

21′′ column ld

3-#9 bars
3-#9
1.5′′ clear
21′′

#4 stirrups

14′′
#4 stirrups full ″
1
length of beam #4 stirrups @4 o.c. spacing
2
for development length ld

CHAPTER 5a. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 29

Procedure for Calculation of ld


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1 (cont’d)
3#9 bars : d b = 1.128′′ From Table 1

(1) α = 1.3, β = 1.0, γ = 1.0, and λ = 1.0


(2) αβ = (1.3)(1) = 1.3 < 1.7 OK
1.128
(3) cover : c = 1.5 + 0.5 + = 2.56′′
2
Dia. #4 stirrup
14 − 2(1.5) − 2(0.5) − 1.128 Controls
Half - spacing : c = = 2.22′′
2(2 )
Atr f yt 0.4(60,000)
(4) K tr = = = 1.185
1500sn 1500(4.5)(3)
Area of 2 #4 stirrups

15
CHAPTER 5a. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 30

Procedure for Calculation of ld


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1 (cont’d)
Table 1. ASTM Standard - English Reinforcing Bars
Diameter Area Weight
Bar Designation
in in2 lb/ft
#3 [#10] 0.375 0.11 0.376
#4 [#13] 0.500 0.20 0.668
#5 [#16] 0.625 0.31 1.043
#6 [#19] 0.750 0.44 1.502
#7 [#22] 0.875 0.60 2.044
#8 [#25] 1.000 0.79 2.670
#9 [#29] 1.128 1.00 3.400
#10 [#32] 1.270 1.27 4.303
#11 [#36] 1.410 1.56 5.313
#14 [#43] 1.693 2.25 7.650
#18 [#57] 2.257 4.00 13.60
Note: Metric designations are in brackets

CHAPTER 5a. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 31

Procedure for Calculation of ld


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1 (cont’d)
Table 2. Areas of Multiple of Reinforcing Bars (in2)
Number Bar number
of bars #3 #4 $5 #6 #7 #8 #9 #10 #11
1 0.11 0.20 0.31 0.44 0.60 0.79 1.00 1.27 1.56
2 0.22 0.40 0.62 0.88 1.20 1.58 2.00 2.54 3.12
3 0.33 0.60 0.93 1.32 1.80 2.37 3.00 3.81 4.68
4 0.44 0.80 1.24 1.76 2.40 3.16 4.00 5.08 6.24
5 0.55 1.00 1.55 2.20 3.00 3.95 5.00 6.35 7.80
6 0.66 1.20 1.86 2.64 3.60 4.74 6.00 7.62 9.36
7 0.77 1.40 2.17 3.08 4.20 5.53 7.00 8.89 10.92
8 0.88 1.60 2.48 3.52 4.80 6.32 8.00 10.16 12.48
9 0.99 1.80 2.79 3.96 5.40 7.11 9.00 11.43 14.04
10 1.10 2.00 3.10 4.40 6.00 7.90 10.00 12.70 15.60

Table A-2 Textbook

16
CHAPTER 5a. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 32

Procedure for Calculation of ld


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1 (cont’d)
c + K tr 2.22 + 1.185
(5) = = 3.02 > 2.5, Therefore, use 2.5
db 1.128
As required 2.75
(6) K ER = = = 0.917
As provided 3.00
(7) Calculate the development length ld using Eq.1 :

 
 
3  f y   αβγλ
 d
ld =
40  f c′    c + ktr 
b

   
  d b  

CHAPTER 5a. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 33

Procedure for Calculation of ld


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1 (cont’d)
Reduction factor  
 
3  f y   αβγλ 
ld = K ER × db
40  f c′    c + ktr  
   
  d b  
3  60,000  1.3(1)(1)(1)
ld = 0.917 ×   (1.128) = 38.3′′
40  4,000   2.5 

38.3 in. > 12 in OK

17
Reinforced Concrete Design Fifth Edition
CHAPTER
DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES,
AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR
CUTOFFS
• A. J. Clark School of Engineering •Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering

Part I – Concrete Design and Analysis

By

5b
FALL 2002 Dr . Ibrahim. Assakkaf

ENCE 355 - Introduction to Structural Design


Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering
University of Maryland, College Park

CHAPTER 5b. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 1
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Development Length:
Compression Bars
Q Deformed Bars in Compression
– The method for determining the
development length in compression ld
involves finding the the basic development
length ldb and multiplying it by applicable
modification factors.
– The modification factors reflect special
conditions.
– Note: ld shall not be less than 8 in.

1
CHAPTER 5b. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 2
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Development Length:
Compression Bars
Q Basic Development Length (compression)
The basic development length in
compression is given by
fy
ldb = 0.02d b (1)
f c′
But it shouldn’t be less than 0.0003fydb
according to the ACI Code, Section 12.3.

CHAPTER 5b. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 3
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Development Length:
Compression Bars
Q Modification Factors (Compression)
– The following modification factors may be
applied to the basic development length for
compression bars:
1. Reinforcement in excess of that required:
As required
As provided

2. Bars enclosed within a spiral that is not less than


¼ in. in diameter and not more than 4 in. in pitch
or within No. 4 ties and spaced at not more than
4 in. on center: USE 0.75

2
CHAPTER 5b. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 4
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Development Length:
Compression Bars
Q Tables 1a through 1c gives values of
the basic development length ldb for
compression bars in inches for the
following combinations of f c′ and fy:

f c′ : 3000, 4000, 5000, and 6000 psi

fy: 40,000, 50,000, and 60,000 psi

CHAPTER 5b. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 5
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Development Length:
Compression Bars
Table 1a. Basic Development Length ldb for
Compression Bars (in.) for fy = 40,000 psi
f c′ (normal-weight concrete), psi
Bar Size
3000 4000 5000 6000
3 5.5 4.7 4.5 4.5
4 7.3 6.3 6.0 6.0
5 9.1 7.9 7.5 7.5
6 11.0 9.5 9.0 9.0
7 12.8 11.1 10.5 10.5
8 14.6 12.6 12.0 12.0
9 16.5 14.3 13.5 13.5
10 18.5 16.1 15.2 15.2
11 20.6 17.8 16.9 16.9
14 24.7 21.4 20.3 20.3
18 33.0 28.5 27.1 27.1

3
CHAPTER 5b. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 6
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Development Length:
Compression Bars
Table 1b. Basic Development Length ldb for
Compression Bars (in.) for fy = 50,000 psi
f c′ (normal-weight concrete), psi
Bar Size
3000 4000 5000 6000
3 6.8 5.9 5.6 5.6
4 9.1 7.9 7.5 7.5
5 11.4 9.9 9.4 9.4
6 13.7 11.9 11.3 11.3
7 16.0 13.8 13.1 13.1
8 18.3 15.8 15.0 15.0
9 20.6 17.8 16.9 16.9
10 23.2 20.1 19.1 19.1
11 25.7 22.3 21.2 21.2
14 30.9 26.8 25.4 25.4
18 41.2 35.7 33.9 33.9

CHAPTER 5b. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 7
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Development Length:
Compression Bars
Table 1c. Basic Development Length ldb for
Compression Bars (in.) for fy = 60,000 psi
f c′ (normal-weight concrete), psi
Bar Size
3000 4000 5000 6000
3 8.2 7.1 6.8 6.8
4 11.0 9.5 9.0 9.0
5 13.7 11.9 11.3 11.3
6 16.4 14.2 13.5 13.5
7 19.2 16.6 15.8 15.8
8 21.9 19.0 18.0 18.0
9 24.7 21.4 20.3 20.3
10 27.8 24.1 22.9 22.9
11 30.9 26.8 25.4 25.4
14 37.1 32.1 30.5 30.5
18 49.4 42.8 40.6 40.6

4
CHAPTER 5b. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 8
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Development Length: Standard


Hooks in Tension
Q Need for Hooks
– In the event that the desired
development length in tension
cannot be furnished, it will be
necessary to provide mechanical
anchorage at the end of the bars

CHAPTER 5b. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 9
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Development Length: Standard


Hooks in Tension
Q Need for Hooks
ld ld
Hook

Beam
Column
Figure 1. 180°-Hook

5
CHAPTER 5b. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 10
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Development Length: Standard


Hooks in Tension
Q Types of Hooks
– Anchorage for main or primary
reinforcement is usually accomplished by
means of 90° or 180° hook.
– The dimensions and bend radii for these
hooks have been standardized by the ACI
Code.
– Standard reinforcement hooks are shown
in Fig. 2.

CHAPTER 5b. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 11
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Development Length: Standard


Hooks in Tension
Q Types of Hooks

Figure 2a. Standard Hooks

6
CHAPTER 5b. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 12
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Development Length: Standard


Hooks in Tension
Q Types of Hooks

Figure 2b. Standard Hooks

CHAPTER 5b. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 13
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Development Length: Standard


Hooks in Tension
Q Types of Hooks

Figure 3. Standard Hooks

7
CHAPTER 5b. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 14
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Development Length: Standard


Hooks in Tension
Q ACI Code Specifications
– The ACI Code specifies that the
development length ldh (see Fig. 2) for
deformed bars in tension, which terminate
in a standard hook, be computed as the
product of a basic development length lhb
and any applicable modification factors.
– Mathematically, this may expressed as

ldh = lhb × MF (2)

CHAPTER 5b. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 15
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Development Length: Standard


Hooks in Tension
Q ACI Basic Development Length, lhb
– For a hooked bar with fy = 60,000 psi,

1200d b (3)
lhb =
f c′

– Table 1 (Table A-13, Textbook) provides


values for lhb.

8
CHAPTER 5b. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 16
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Development Length: Standard


Hooks in Tension
Q ACI Modification Factors (MF)
– Modification factors are to be used if
applicable:
1. Bars with fy other than 60,000 psi, USE
fy
MF = (4)
60,000
2. Concrete cover for No. 3 through No. 11: Side
cover (normal to the plane of the hook ) ≥ 2 ½ in.
and, for 90° hooks, cover on bar extension
beyond the bend ≥ 2 in.: USE 0.7 for MF

CHAPTER 5b. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 17
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Development Length: Standard


Hooks in Tension
Q ACI Modification Factors, MF (cont’d)
3. Ties or stirrups: For No. 3 through No. 11 with
hook enclosed vertically of horizontally within
ties or stirrup ties spaced along the full
development length ldh not greater than 3db:
USE MF = 0.8.
4. Reinforcement in excess of that required,
where anchorage or development for fy is not
specifically required:
As required (5)
MF =
As provided

9
CHAPTER 5b. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 18
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Development Length: Standard


Hooks in Tension
Q ACI Modification Factors, MF (cont’d)
5. Lightweight aggregate concrete: USE

MF = 1.3 (6)

6. Epoxy-coated reinforcement: USE

MF = 1.2 (7)

CHAPTER 5b. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 19
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Development Length: Standard


Hooks in Tension
Q ACI Modification Factors, MF (cont’d)
– The basic development length lhb must be
multiplied by the application factors
outlined in the previous viewgraphs.
– In no case may ldb be less than 8db or 6 in.,
whichever is greater.

10
CHAPTER 5b. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 20
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Development Length: Standard


Hooks in Tension
Q Example 1
Determine the anchorage or development
length required for
f c′ the conditions shown in
the figure. Use = 3,000 psi (normal-
weight concrete) and fy = 60,000 psi. The
No. 8 bars may be categorized as top bars.
Assume a side cover on the main bars of
2 ½ in. minimum. Bars are uncoated.

CHAPTER 5b. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 21
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Development Length: Standard


Hooks in Tension
Q Example 1 (cont’d)
Column

ld (minimum) ld (minimum) 14′′


3-#8 bars
2′′ clear #8 bars 18′′ 2′′ clear

#4 stirrups
24′′
Stirrups @ 5′′ o.c.
Beam

11
CHAPTER 5b. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 22
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Development Length: Standard


Hooks in Tension
Q Example 1 (cont’d)
Anchorage into the exterior column:
1. Establish values for the multiplying
factors α, β, γ, and λ:
a. α = 1.3 (the bars are top bars).
b. β = 1.0 (the bars are uncoated).
c. γ = 1.0 (the bars are No. 8)
d. λ = 1.0 (normal-weight concrete used)
2. The product α ×β = 1.3 < 1.7 (OK)

CHAPTER 5b. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 23
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Development Length: Standard


Hooks in Tension
Q Example 1 (cont’d)
3. Determine c. Based on cover (center of bar
to nearest concrete surface), consider the
clear cover, the No. 4 stirrups diameter, and
one-half the diameter of the No. 8 bar:
1.0
c = 2.0 + 0.5 + = 3.0 in.
2
Based on bar spacing:
14 − 2(2.0 ) − 2(0.5) − 2(0.5) Controls
c= = 2.0 in.
2(2 )

Therefore, use c = 2.0 in (smallest)

12
CHAPTER 5b. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 24
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Development Length: Standard


Hooks in Tension
Table 2. ASTM Standard - English Reinforcing Bars
Diameter Area Weight
Bar Designation
in in2 lb/ft
#3 [#10] 0.375 0.11 0.376
#4 [#13] 0.500 0.20 0.668
#5 [#16] 0.625 0.31 1.043
#6 [#19] 0.750 0.44 1.502
#7 [#22] 0.875 0.60 2.044
#8 [#25] 1.000 0.79 2.670
#9 [#29] 1.128 1.00 3.400
#10 [#32] 1.270 1.27 4.303
#11 [#36] 1.410 1.56 5.313
#14 [#43] 1.693 2.25 7.650
#18 [#57] 2.257 4.00 13.60
Note: Metric designations are in brackets

CHAPTER 5b. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 25
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Development Length: Standard


Hooks in Tension
Q Example 1 (cont’d)
4. The figure shows stirrups in the beam.
However, there are no stirrups in the
column, and Ktr can be taken as zero for
the column anchorage.
5. Check (c + Ktr)/db ≤ 2.5:
c + K tr 2.0 + 0
= = 2.0 < 2.5 ⇒ USE 2.0
db 1.0
6. The access reinforcement can be ignored
and the factor applied can be omitted.

13
CHAPTER 5b. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 26
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Development Length: Standard


Hooks in Tension
Q Example 1 (cont’d)
7. Calculate ld:
 
 
3  f y   αβγλ 
ld =  db
40  f c′    c + ktr  
   
  d b  
3  60,000  1.3(1)(1)(1) 
ld =   (1.0) = 53.4 in. > 12 in. OK
40  3,000   2.0 

Since 53.4 in > 24 in. (column width), use


a standard hook, either a 90° hook or a
180° hook.

CHAPTER 5b. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 27
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Development Length: Standard


Hooks in Tension
Q Example 1 (cont’d)
Anchorage using a standard 180° hook:
1. The basic development length lhb for the
standard hook shown in the figure can be
computed from
1200d b 1200(1)
lhb = = = 21.9 in. (also check Table 1c)
f c′ 3000

2. The only applicable MF is based on side


cover of 2 ½ in.
Therefore, USE MF = 0.7

14
CHAPTER 5b. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 28
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Development Length: Standard


Hooks in Tension
Table 1c. Basic Development Length ldb for
Compression Bars (in.) for fy = 60,000 psi
f c′ (normal-weight concrete), psi
Bar Size
3000 4000 5000 6000
3 8.2 7.1 6.8 6.8
4 11.0 9.5 9.0 9.0
5 13.7 11.9 11.3 11.3
6 16.4 14.2 13.5 13.5
7 19.2 16.6 15.8 15.8
8 21.9 19.0 18.0 18.0
9 24.7 21.4 20.3 20.3
10 27.8 24.1 22.9 22.9
11 30.9 26.8 25.4 25.4
14 37.1 32.1 30.5 30.5
18 49.4 42.8 40.6 40.6

CHAPTER 5b. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 29
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Development Length: Standard


Hooks in Tension
Q Example 1 (cont’d)
3. The required development length is then
calculated from
ldh = lhb × MF = 21.9(0.7 ) = 15.3 in.
Check minimum :
minimum ldh = 8d b ≥ 6 in.
8d b = 8 in. < 15.3 in. OK

The minimum width of column required is


15.3 + 2.5 = 17.8 in. < 24 in. (column width) OK
Therefore, the hook will fit into the column.

15
CHAPTER 5b. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 30
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Development Length: Standard


Hooks in Tension
Q Example 1 (cont’d)
Anchorage into beam:
The development length required if bars
are straight can be taken as 53.4 in. as
determined previously. However, this
number is conservative (Ktr = 0).
To determine a more accurate value, we
have to take into consideration the
transverse reinforcement index Ktr
because there are stirrups in the beam.

CHAPTER 5b. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 31
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Development Length: Standard


Hooks in Tension
Q Example 1 (cont’d) Area of 2 #4 stirrups
Atr f yt 0.4(60,000)
K tr = = = 1.067
1500sn 1500(5)(3)
c + K tr 2.0 + 1.067
= = 3.07 < 2.5 ⇒ USE 2.5
db 1.0
 
 
3  f y   αβγλ 
ld = db
40  f c′    c + ktr  
   
  d b  
3  60,000  1.3(1)(1)(1) 
ld =   (1.0) = 42.7 in. > 12 in. OK
40  3,000   2.5 

16
CHAPTER 5b. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 32
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Development Length: Standard


Hooks in Tension
Table 2. ASTM Standard - English Reinforcing Bars
Diameter Area Weight
Bar Designation
in in2 lb/ft
#3 [#10] 0.375 0.11 0.376
#4 [#13] 0.500 0.20 0.668
#5 [#16] 0.625 0.31 1.043
#6 [#19] 0.750 0.44 1.502
#7 [#22] 0.875 0.60 2.044
#8 [#25] 1.000 0.79 2.670
#9 [#29] 1.128 1.00 3.400
#10 [#32] 1.270 1.27 4.303
#11 [#36] 1.410 1.56 5.313
#14 [#43] 1.693 2.25 7.650
#18 [#57] 2.257 4.00 13.60
Note: Metric designations are in brackets

CHAPTER 5b. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 33
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Development Length: Standard


Hooks in Tension
Q Example 1 (cont’d)
Anchorage into beam (cont’d):
– The development length required if bars
are straight is 42.7 in.
– Therefore, the bars must extend at least
this distance into the span.
– Figure 4 shows the detailed sketch for the
development length.

17
CHAPTER 5b. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 34
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Development Length: Standard


Hooks in Tension
Q Example 1 (cont’d)
″ Required = 15.3′′ min.
1 ldb
2 cover
2
#8 bars
180° Hook 18′′

Beam
Column 24′′

Figure 4. Detailed Sketch for Example 1

18
Reinforced Concrete Design Fifth Edition
CHAPTER
DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES,
AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR
CUTOFFS
• A. J. Clark School of Engineering •Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering

Part I – Concrete Design and Analysis

By

5c
FALL 2002 Dr . Ibrahim. Assakkaf

ENCE 355 - Introduction to Structural Design


Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering
University of Maryland, College Park

CHAPTER 5c. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 1

Simple-Span Bar Cutoffs and Bends


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Determination of Bar Cutoffs


– Recall that the maximum required As for a
beam is needed only where the moment is
maximum.
– This maximum steel may be needed at
points along a bending member where the
bending moment is smaller.
– This can be done by either stopping or
bending the bars in a manner consistent
with the theoretical requirements for the
strength of the member and the ACI Code.

1
CHAPTER 5c. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 2

Simple-Span Bar Cutoffs and Bends


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Determination of Bar Cutoffs


– In theory bars can be stopped or bent in
bending members whenever they are no
longer needed to resist the bending
moment.
– However, the ACI Code requires that each
bar be extended beyond the point at which
it is no longer needed for flexure a distance
equal to the effective depth d of the cross
section or 12db, whichever is greater.

CHAPTER 5c. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 3

Simple-Span Bar Cutoffs and Bends


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Determination of Bar Cutoffs


– The ACI code gives the following
exceptions to the previous rules:
1. At supports of simple spans, and
2. At free ends of cantilever beams.
• This in effect prohibits the cutting off of a
bar at the theoretical cutoff point, but can
be bent at the theoretical cutoff point.
• If bars are to be bent, it is common to start
the bend at a distance equal to one-half
the effective depth beyond the point.

2
CHAPTER 5c. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 4

Simple-Span Bar Cutoffs and Bends


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q General Procedure for Determining the


Theoretical Cutoff Point
1. Establish a bar cutoff scheme (i.e., select
the bars that will be cut off first).
2. Plot the complete Mu diagram.
3. Superimpose on the Mu diagram the values
of φ Mn corresponding to the bars of Step 1
that will not be stopped.
4. The theoretical points are established
where the φ Mn lines intersect the Mu curve.

CHAPTER 5c. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 5

Simple-Span Bar Cutoffs and Bends


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example: Bar Cutoff Point


For the simply supported beam shown in
the figure, determine the theoretical and
actual cutoff point for the center No. 10
bar. The beam is to carry a distributed
dead load of 0.54 kips/ft including its own
weight, and live service load of 1.08 kips/ft.
Material strengths specified are f c′ = 4,000
psi and fy = 60,000 psi.

3
CHAPTER 5c. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 6

Simple-Span Bar Cutoffs and Bends


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example: Bar Cutoff Point (cont’d)


CL
wL = 1.08 k/ft 12′′
wD = 0.54 k/ft

16′′ 19′′
3 #10

24′ − 9′′

Top View

d cutoff ?

CHAPTER 5c. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 7

Simple-Span Bar Cutoffs and Bends


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example: Bar Cutoff Point (cont’d)


Determine factored distributed load:
wu = 1.4(0.54) + 1.7(1.08) = 2.592 kips/ft

1. Bar cutoff scheme has been established


for the center No. 10 bar.
2. Plot of the complete Mu diagram:
In order to do that, we have to find an
expression for Mu based on the loading

4
CHAPTER 5c. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 8

Simple-Span Bar Cutoffs and Bends


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example: Bar Cutoff Point (cont’d)


wu = 2.592 kips/ft

(24′ − 9′′) = 24.75′

32.1 kips 32.1 kips

2.592 kips/ft Mx

x2
x M x = 32.1x − 2.592 = 32.1x − 1.296 x 2 (1)
2
Vx
Note: Mx = Mu(x)
32.1 kips

CHAPTER 5c. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 9

Simple-Span Bar Cutoffs and Bends


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example: Bar Cutoff Point (cont’d)


– Thus, the plot of Mu will appear as follows:
wu = 2.592 kips/ft

(24′ − 9′′) = 24.75′

32.1 kips 32.1 kips


250

200

150
-ki
M u (ft

100

50

0
0 5 10 15 20 25
x (ft)

5
CHAPTER 5c. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 10

Simple-Span Bar Cutoffs and Bends


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example: Bar Cutoff Point (cont’d)


250

200
Muu(ft(ft-kips)

150
-ki

100
M

50

0
0 5 10 15 20 25
x (ft)

CHAPTER 5c. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 11

Simple-Span Bar Cutoffs and Bends


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example: Bar Cutoff Point (cont’d)


3. Superimpose on the Mu diagram the
values of φ Mu corresponding to 2 No.
10 bars:
φM n for 2 #10 bars :
As 2.54
ρ= = = 0.0132
bd 12(16 )
From Table 2, k corresponding to 0.0132 is
k = 0.6998 ksi
As ,min = 0.0033(b )(d ) = 0.0033(12)(16) = 0.63 in 2 < 2.54 in 2 OK

6
CHAPTER 5c. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 12

Simple-Span Bar Cutoffs and Bends


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example: Bar Cutoff Point (cont’d)


Table 1. Areas of Multiple of Reinforcing Bars (in2)
Number Bar number
of bars #3 #4 $5 #6 #7 #8 #9 #10 #11
1 0.11 0.20 0.31 0.44 0.60 0.79 1.00 1.27 1.56
2 0.22 0.40 0.62 0.88 1.20 1.58 2.00 2.54 3.12
3 0.33 0.60 0.93 1.32 1.80 2.37 3.00 3.81 4.68
4 0.44 0.80 1.24 1.76 2.40 3.16 4.00 5.08 6.24
5 0.55 1.00 1.55 2.20 3.00 3.95 5.00 6.35 7.80
6 0.66 1.20 1.86 2.64 3.60 4.74 6.00 7.62 9.36
7 0.77 1.40 2.17 3.08 4.20 5.53 7.00 8.89 10.92
8 0.88 1.60 2.48 3.52 4.80 6.32 8.00 10.16 12.48
9 0.99 1.80 2.79 3.96 5.40 7.11 9.00 11.43 14.04
10 1.10 2.00 3.10 4.40 6.00 7.90 10.00 12.70 15.60

Table A-2 Textbook

CHAPTER 5c. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 13

Simple-Span Bar Cutoffs and Bends


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example: Bar Cutoff Point (cont’d)

Table 2 (Table A-10, Text)


ρ k ρ k ρ k
0.0092 0.5072 0.0128 0.6813 0.0164 0.8417
0.0093 0.5122 0.0129 0.6859 0.0165 0.8459
0.0094 0.5172 0.0130 0.6906 0.0166 0.8502
0.0095 0.5222 0.0131 0.6952 0.0167 0.8544
0.0096 0.5272 0.0132 0.6998 0.0168 0.8586
0.0097 0.5322 0.0133 0.7044 0.0169 0.8629
0.0098 0.5372 0.0134 0.7090 0.0170 0.8671
0.0099 0.5421 0.0135 0.7136 0.0171 0.8713
0.0100 0.5471 0.0136 0.7181 0.0172 0.8754

7
CHAPTER 5c. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 14

Simple-Span Bar Cutoffs and Bends


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example: Bar Cutoff Point (cont’d)


0.9(12 )(16 ) (0.6998)
2
φM n = φbd 2 k = = 161.2 ft - kips
12

– The line φMn = 161.2 intersects the curve of


Mu at 7 in. and 17.7 in. Therefore, the
theoretical cutoff point is located 7 ft. from
the face of either support.
– The actual cutoff point:
d = 16′′ = 1.33′ and 12d b = 12(1.27) = 15.24′′ = 1.27′
controls Dia. No. 10 bar
Hence,
actual cutoff point = 7 - 1.33 = 5.7 ft from F.O.S

CHAPTER 5c. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 15

Simple-Span Bar Cutoffs and Bends


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example: Bar Cutoff Point (cont’d)


Table 3. ASTM Standard - English Reinforcing Bars
Diameter Area Weight
Bar Designation
in in2 lb/ft
#3 [#10] 0.375 0.11 0.376
#4 [#13] 0.500 0.20 0.668
#5 [#16] 0.625 0.31 1.043
#6 [#19] 0.750 0.44 1.502
#7 [#22] 0.875 0.60 2.044
#8 [#25] 1.000 0.79 2.670
#9 [#29] 1.128 1.00 3.400
#10 [#32] 1.270 1.27 4.303
#11 [#36] 1.410 1.56 5.313
#14 [#43] 1.693 2.25 7.650
#18 [#57] 2.257 4.00 13.60
Note: Metric designations are in brackets

8
CHAPTER 5c. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 16

Simple-Span Bar Cutoffs and Bends


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

250

200 φM u = 161.2 ft-k

150
Muuft(ft-kips)
(

100
M

50

0
0 5 10 15 20 25
7 x (ft) 18
17.7

CHAPTER 5c. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 17

Simple-Span Bar Cutoffs and Bends


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example: Bar Cutoff Point (cont’d)


CL
wL = 1.08 k/ft 12′′
wD = 0.54 k/ft

16′′ 19′′
x 3 #10

24′ − 9′′

Top View

5.7′ 5.7′
13.4′

9
CHAPTER 5c. DEVELOPMENT, SPLICES, AND SIMPLE SPAN BAR CUTOFFS Slide No. 18

Simple-Span Bar Cutoffs and Bends


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example: Bar Cutoff Point (cont’d)


– Alternative Method to Find the Theoretical
Cutoff Point:
• In method, the φMn value for the continuous
reinforcement can be substituted into Eq. 1,
and consequently the distances from the face
of the right support can be located analytically
as follows:
φM n = 161.2 = 32.1x − 1.296 x 2
or 1.296 x 2 − 32.1x + 161.2 = 0
from which (quadratic formula) :
32.1 ± (32.1)2 − 4(1.296)161.2
x= = 7.0 in, 17.7 in
2(1.296)

10
Reinforced Concrete Design Fifth Edition
CHAPTER

COLUMNS
• A. J. Clark School of Engineering •Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering

Part I – Concrete Design and Analysis

By

9a
FALL 2002 Dr . Ibrahim. Assakkaf

ENCE 355 - Introduction to Structural Design


Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering
University of Maryland, College Park

CHAPTER 9a. COLUMNS Slide No. 1

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Axial Compression
– Columns are defined as members that
carry loads in compression.
– Usually they carry bending moments as
well, about one or both axes of the cross
section.
– The bending action may produce tensile
forces over a part of the cross section.
– Despite of the tensile forces or stresses
that may be produced, columns are

1
CHAPTER 9a. COLUMNS Slide No. 2

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Axial Compression
– Generally referred to as :compression
members” because the compression forces
or stresses dominate their behavior.
– In addition to the most common type of
compression members (vertical elements
in structures), compression members
include:
• Arch ribs
• Rigid frame members inclined or otherwise
• Compression elements in trusses
• shells

CHAPTER 9a. COLUMNS Slide No. 3

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

2
CHAPTER 9a. COLUMNS Slide No. 4

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Reinforced Concrete Columns

CHAPTER 9a. COLUMNS Slide No. 5

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf
Pont-
Pont-du-
du-Gard.
Gard. Roman aqueduct built in 19 B.C. to carry water
across the Gardon Valley to Nimes.
Nimes. Spans of the first and second
level arches are 53-
53-80 feet. (Near Remoulins,
Remoulins, France)

3
CHAPTER 9a. COLUMNS Slide No. 6
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Ohio River Bridge. Typical cantilever and suspended span bridge, showing
the truss geometry in the end span and cantilevered portion of the
the main
span. (Madison, Indiana)

CHAPTER 9a. COLUMNS Slide No. 7

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

4
CHAPTER 9a. COLUMNS Slide No. 8

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

CHAPTER 9a. COLUMNS Slide No. 9

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Column load transfer from beams and slabs


1) Tributary area method:
Half distance to adjacent columns

Load on column = area × floor load


y
Floor load = DL + LL

DL = slab thickness × conc. unit wt.

x
Example: x = 16.0 ft, y = 13.0 ft, LL = 62.4 lb/ft2, slab thickness = 4.0 in.

Floor load = 4.0 (150)/12 + 62.4 = 112.4 lb/ft2

Load on column = (16.0)(13.0)(112.4) = 10,800 kg = 23.4 kips

5
CHAPTER 9a. COLUMNS Slide No. 10

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Column load transfer from beams and slabs


2) Beams reaction method:
Collect loads from adjacent beam ends

B1 B2

B4
RB1 RB2
B1 C1 B2
RB1 RB2

B3

CHAPTER 9a. COLUMNS Slide No. 11

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Load summation on column section for design


ROOF

Load on 2nd floor column


Design section
2nd FLOOR = Roof floor + Column wt.

Load on 1st floor column


Design section = load on 2nd floor column
+ 2nd floor + Column wt.
1st FLOOR Ground level

Load on pier column


Design section = load on 1st floor column
+ 1st floor + Column wt.
Footing

6
CHAPTER 9a. COLUMNS Slide No. 12

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Types of Reinforced Concrete


Columns
1. Members reinforced with longitudinal
bars and lateral ties.
2. Members reinforced with longitudinal
bars and continuous spirals.
3. Composite compression members
reinforced longitudinally with structural
steel shapes, pipe, or tubing, with or
without additional longitudinal bars, and
various types of lateral reinforcement.

CHAPTER 9a. COLUMNS Slide No. 13

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Types of Reinforced Concrete Columns

Tie Spiral

Longitudinal
steel
s = pitch

Tied column Spirally reinforced column

7
CHAPTER 9a. COLUMNS Slide No. 14

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Types of Reinforced Concrete Columns

Composite columns

CHAPTER 9a. COLUMNS Slide No. 15

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Types of Columns in Terms of Their


Strengths
1. Short Columns
A column is said to be short when its length is
such that lateral buckling need not be considered.
Most of concrete columns fall into this category.
2. Slender Columns
When the length of the column is such that
buckling need to be considered, the column is
referred to as slender column. It is recognized that
as the length increases, the usable strength of a
given cross section is decreased because of
buckling problem.

8
CHAPTER 9a. COLUMNS Slide No. 16

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Buckling
– Buckling is a mode of failure generally
resulting from structural instability due to
compressive action on the structural
member or element involved.
– Examples
• Overloaded metal building columns.
• Compressive members in bridges.
• Roof trusses.
• Hull of submarine.

CHAPTER 9a. COLUMNS Slide No. 17

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Buckling

Figure 1a

9
CHAPTER 9a. COLUMNS Slide No. 18

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Buckling

Figure 1b

CHAPTER 9a. COLUMNS Slide No. 19

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q The Nature of Buckling


Definition
“Buckling can be defined as the sudden
large deformation of structure due to a
slight increase of an existing load under
which the structure had exhibited little,
if any, deformation before the load was
increased.”

10
CHAPTER 9a. COLUMNS Slide No. 20

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Buckling Failure of Reinforced Concrete


Columns

Figure 2

CHAPTER 9a. COLUMNS Slide No. 21

Introduction
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Critical Buckling Load, Pcr


The critical buckling load (Euler Buckling)
for a long column is given by
π 2 EI (1)
Pcr = 2
where
L
E = modulus of elasticity of the material
I = moment of inertia of the cross section
L = length of column

11
CHAPTER 9a. COLUMNS Slide No. 22
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Strength of Reinforced Concrete


Columns: Small Eccentricity
Q If a compression member is loaded parallel
to its axis by a load P without eccentricity,
the load P theoretically induces a uniform
compressive stress over the cross-sectional
area.
Q If the compressive load is applied a small
distance e away from the longitudinal axis,
however, there is a tendency for the column
to bend due to the moment M = Pe.

CHAPTER 9a. COLUMNS Slide No. 23


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Strength of Reinforced Concrete


Columns: Small Eccentricity
Q Eccentric Axial Loading in a Plane of
Symmetry
– When the line of action of the axial load P
passes through the centriod of the cross
section, it can be assumed that the
distribution of normal stress is uniform
throughout the section.
– Such a loading is said to be centric, as
shown in Fig 3.

12
CHAPTER 9a. COLUMNS Slide No. 24
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Strength of Reinforced Concrete


Columns: Small Eccentricity
Q Eccentric Axial Loading in a Plane of
Symmetry

P
Figure 3. Centric Loading

CHAPTER 9a. COLUMNS Slide No. 25


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Strength of Reinforced Concrete


Columns: Small Eccentricity
Q Eccentric Axial Loading in a Plane of
Symmetry
– When the line of action of the concentrated
load P dose not pass through the centroid
of the cross section, the distribution of
normal stress is no longer uniform.
– Such loading is said to eccentric, as shown
in Fig 4.

13
CHAPTER 9a. COLUMNS Slide No. 26
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Strength of Reinforced Concrete


Columns: Small Eccentricity
Q Eccentric Axial Loading in a Plane of
Symmetry

P

P •
Figure 4. Eccentric Loading

CHAPTER 9a. COLUMNS Slide No. 27


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Strength of Reinforced Concrete


Columns: Small Eccentricity
Q Eccentric Axial Loading in a Plane of
Symmetry
The stress due to eccentric loading on a
beam cross section is given by

P My
fx = ± (2)
A I

14
CHAPTER 9a. COLUMNS Slide No. 28
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Strength of Reinforced Concrete


Columns: Small Eccentricity
Q Columns Loaded with Small Eccentricities
– The concrete column that is loaded with a
compressive axial load P at zero eccentricity
is probably nonexistent, and even the
axial/small eccentricity combination is
relatively rare.
– Nevertheless, the case of columns that are
loaded with compressive axial loads at small
eccentricity e is considered first. In this case
we define the situation in which the induced
small moments are of little significance.

CHAPTER 9a. COLUMNS Slide No. 29


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Strength of Reinforced Concrete


Columns: Small Eccentricity
Q Notations Columns Loaded with Small
Eccentricities
Ag = gross area of the column section (in2)
Ast = total area of longitudinal reinforcement (in2)
P0 = nominal or theoretical axial load at zero eccentricity
Pn = nominal or theoretical axial load at given eccentricity
Pu = factored applied axial load at given eccentricity
ρg = ratio of total longitudinal reinforcement area to
cross-sectional area of column:
Ast (3)
ρg =
Ag

15
CHAPTER 9a. COLUMNS Slide No. 30
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Strength of Reinforced Concrete


Columns: Small Eccentricity
Q Strength of Short Axially Loaded Columns
P0

Steel
fy

Stress
f c′
Section A-A A A Concrete

.001 .002 .003


Strain

CHAPTER 9a. COLUMNS Slide No. 31


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Strength of Reinforced Concrete


Columns: Small Eccentricity
Q Strength of Short Axially Loaded Columns
P0

[ ΣFy = 0 ]
P0 = f c′(Ag − Ast ) + f y Ast
From experiment (e.g., ACI):

f c′ P0 = 0.85 f c′(Ag − Ast ) + f y Ast


where
fy fy
Ag = Gross area of column section
Fs = Ast fy
Fc = (Ag - Ast) f c′ Ast = Longitudinal steel area

16
CHAPTER 9a. COLUMNS Slide No. 32
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Strength of Reinforced Concrete


Columns: Small Eccentricity
Q Column Failure by Axial Load
Pu


Heavy spiral
Initial failure
Pu ACI spiral
Light
Tied column spiral
Axial load

0
Axial deformation ∆

CHAPTER 9a. COLUMNS Slide No. 33


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Strength of Reinforced Concrete


Columns: Small Eccentricity
Q ACI Code Requirements for Column
Strength
φPn ≥ Pu (4)
Spirally reinforced column:

[ ]
φPn (max ) = 0.85φ 0.85 f c′(Ag − Ast ) + f y Ast , φ = 0.75 (5)
Tied column:

[ ]
φPn (max ) = 0.80φ 0.85 f c′(Ag − Ast ) + f y Ast , φ = 0.70 (6)

17
CHAPTER 9a. COLUMNS Slide No. 34
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Code Requirements Concerning


Column Details
Q Limits on percentage of reinforcement

 A 
0.01 ≤  ρ g = st  ≤ 0.08 (7)
 Ag 

Lower limit: To prevent failure mode of plain concrete

Upper limit: To maintain proper clearances between bars

CHAPTER 9a. COLUMNS Slide No. 35


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Code Requirements Concerning


Column Details
Q Minimum Number of Bars
– The minimum number of longitudinal bars
is
• four within rectangular or circular ties
• Three within triangular ties
• Six for bars enclosed by spirals
Q Clear distance between Bars
– The clear distance between longitudinal
bars must not be less than 1.5 times the
nominal bar diameter nor 1 ½ in.

18
CHAPTER 9a. COLUMNS Slide No. 36
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Code Requirements Concerning


Column Details
Q Clear distance between Bars (cont’d)
– Table 1 (Table A-14, Textbook) may be
used to determine the maximum number of
bars allowed in one row around the
periphery of circular or square columns.
Q Cover
– Cover shall be 1 ½ in. minimum over
primary reinforcement, ties or spirals.

CHAPTER 9a. COLUMNS Slide No. 37


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Code Requirements Concerning


Column Details Table A-14, Textbook
Table 1. Preferred Maximum Number of Column Bars in One Row
Q Table 1

19
CHAPTER 9a. COLUMNS Slide No. 38
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Code Requirements Concerning


Column Details
Q Tie Requirements
– According to Section 7.10.5 of ACI Code,
the minimum is
• No. 3 for longitudinal bars No. 10 and smaller
• Otherwise, minimum tie size is No. 4 (see
Table 1 for a suggested tie size)
– The center-to-center spacing of ties must
not exceed the smaller of 16 longitudinal
bar diameter, 48 tie-bar diameter, or the
least column dimension.

CHAPTER 9a. COLUMNS Slide No. 39


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Code Requirements Concerning


Column Details
Q Spiral Requirements
– According to Section 7.10.4 of ACI Code,
the minimum spiral size is 3/8 in. in
diameter for cast-in-place construction (5/8
is usually maximum).
– Clear space between spirals must not
exceed 3 in. or be less than 1 in.

20
CHAPTER 9a. COLUMNS Slide No. 40
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Code Requirements Concerning


Column Details
Q Spiral Requirements (cont’d)
– The spiral steel ratio ρs must not be less
than the value given by
A  f′
ρ s (min ) = 0.45 g − 1 c (8)
 Ac  fy
where
volume of spiral steel in one turn
ρs =
volume of column core in height ( s )
s = center-to-center spacing of spiral (in.), also called pitch
Ag = gross cross-sectional area of the column (in2)
Ac = cross-sectional area of the core (in2) (out-to-out of spiral)
fy = spiral steel yield point (psi) ≤ 60,000 psi
= compressive strength of concrete (psi)

CHAPTER 9a. COLUMNS Slide No. 41


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Code Requirements Concerning


Column Details
Q Spiral Requirements (cont’d)
– An Approximate Formula for Spiral Steel
Ratio
• A formula in terms of the physical properties of
the column cross section can be derived from
the definition of ρs.
• In reference to Fig. 5, the overall core diameter
(out-to-out of spiral) is denoted as Dc, and the
spiral diameter (center-to-center) as Ds.
• The cross-sectional area of the spiral bar or
wire is given the symbol Asp.

21
CHAPTER 9a. COLUMNS Slide No. 42
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Code Requirements Concerning


Column Details
Q Spiral Requirements (cont’d)
Dc

Spiral

Ds
Figure 5. Definition of Dc and Ds

CHAPTER 9a. COLUMNS Slide No. 43


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Code Requirements Concerning


Column Details
Q Spiral Requirements (cont’d)
– From the definition of ρs, an expression
may written as follows:
AspπDs
actual ρ s = (9)
(πD / 4)(s )
2
c

– If the small difference between Dc and Ds is


neglected, then in terms of Dc, the actual
spiral steel ratio is given by
4 Asp
actual ρ s = (10)
Dc s

22
Reinforced Concrete Design Fifth Edition
CHAPTER

COLUMNS
• A. J. Clark School of Engineering •Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering

Part I – Concrete Design and Analysis

By

9b
FALL 2002 Dr . Ibrahim. Assakkaf

ENCE 355 - Introduction to Structural Design


Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering
University of Maryland, College Park

CHAPTER 9b. COLUMNS Slide No. 1


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Analysis of Short Columns:


Small Eccentricity
Q The analysis of short columns carrying
axial loads that have small eccentricities
involves:
– Checking the maximum design axial load
strength, and
– Checking the various details of the
reinforcing.

1
CHAPTER 9b. COLUMNS Slide No. 2
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Analysis of Short Columns:


Small Eccentricity
Q Procedure for Analysis of Short
Columns with Small Eccentricities
1. Check ρg within acceptable limits as
stipulated by the ACI Code:
0.01 ≤ ρ g ≤ 0.08 (1)
2. Check the number of bars within
acceptable limits for the clear space (see
Table 1, Table A-14, Text). The minimum
number is four for bars with rectangular
or circular ties and six for bars enclosed
by spirals.

CHAPTER 9b. COLUMNS Slide No. 3


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Analysis of Short Columns:


Small Eccentricity
3. Calculate the maximum design axial load
strength φPn(max).
4. Check the lateral reinforcing. For ties,
check size, spacing, and arrangement.
For spirals, check ρs, and clear distance.

2
CHAPTER 9b. COLUMNS Slide No. 4
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Analysis of Short Columns:


Small Eccentricity
Q Example 1
Find the maximum design axial load
strength for the tied column of cross
section shown in the figure. Check the
ties. Assume a short column. The
materials strength specified are f c′ = 4000
psi and fy = 60,000 psi for both
longitudinally steel and ties.

CHAPTER 9b. COLUMNS Slide No. 5


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Analysis of Short Columns:


Small Eccentricity
Q Example 1 (cont’d)
16′′

1
1 cover
16′′ 2
#3 @ 16′′

8-#9 bars

3
CHAPTER 9b. COLUMNS Slide No. 6
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Analysis of Short Columns:


Small Eccentricity
Q Example 1 (cont’d)
1. Check the steel ratio for longitudinal
steel:
Ast 8.00
ρg = = = 0.0313
Ag (16)2
0.01 < 0.0313 < 0.08 OK

2. From Table 1 (Table A-14, Text), using a


13-in. core (column size less cover on
each side), the maximum number of No.
9 bars is eight. This is OK.

CHAPTER 9b. COLUMNS Slide No. 7


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Analysis of Short Columns:


Small Eccentricity Table A-14, Textbook
Table 1. Preferred Maximum Number of Column Bars in One Row
Q Table 1

4
CHAPTER 9b. COLUMNS Slide No. 8
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Analysis of Short Columns:


Small Eccentricity
Q Example 1 (cont’d)
3. The maximum design axial load strength
may now be computed as follows:
[
φPn (max ) = 0.80φ 0.85 f ′(Ag − Ast )c + f y Ast ]
= 0.80(0.70 )[0.85(4 )(256 − 8) + (60 )(8)]
= 741 kips
4. Check the ties. The size of No. 3 is OK
for longitudinal bar size up to No. 10. The
spacing of the ties must not exceed the
smaller of

CHAPTER 9b. COLUMNS Slide No. 9


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Analysis of Short Columns:


Small Eccentricity
Q Example 1 (cont’d)
48 tie-bar diameter = 38 (3/8) = 18 in.
16 longitudinal-bar diameter = 16 (1.128) = 18 in.
Least column dimension = 16 in.
Therefore, the tie spacing is OK.
Check clear distance:
16 − 2(1.5) − 2(3 / 8) − 3(1.128)
clear distance =
2
= 4.4 in. < 6 in. OK

5
CHAPTER 9b. COLUMNS Slide No. 10
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Analysis of Short Columns:


Small Eccentricity
Q Example 2
A short circular spiral column having a
diameter of 18 in. is reinforced with eight
No. 9 bars. The cover is 1 ½ in., and the
spiral is 3/8 in. in diameter spaced 2 in. o.c.
Find the maximum design axial load
strength and check the spiral. Use f c′ =
3000 psi and fy = 40,000 psi

CHAPTER 9b. COLUMNS Slide No. 11


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Analysis of Short Columns:


Small Eccentricity
Q Example 2 (cont’d)
1. Check the steel ratio for longitudinal steel:

Ast 8.00
ρg = = = 0.0314
Ag π (9)2
0.01 < 0.0314 < 0.08 OK

2. From Table 1 (Table A-14, Text), and for


circular column, the maximum number of #
9 bars is 10. This is OK

6
CHAPTER 9b. COLUMNS Slide No. 12
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Analysis of Short Columns:


Small Eccentricity Table A-14, Textbook
Table 2. Preferred Maximum Number of Column Bars in One Row
Q Table 1

CHAPTER 9b. COLUMNS Slide No. 13


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Analysis of Short Columns:


Small Eccentricity πD π (18) 2 2
Ag = = = 254.5 in 2
Q Example 2 (cont’d) 4 4
3. The maximum design axial load strength may
now be computed as follows:
[
φPn (max ) = 0.80φ 0.85 f ′(Ag − Ast )c + f y Ast ]
= 0.85(0.75)[0.85(3)(254.5 − 8) + (40 )(8)]
= 604.7 kips
4. Check spirals: 3/8 in. spiral
4A 4(0.11)
actual ρ s = sp = = 0.0147
Dc s 15(2)

7
CHAPTER 9b. COLUMNS Slide No. 14
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Analysis of Short Columns:


Small Eccentricity
Q Example 2 (cont’d)
AspπDs Dc
actual ρ s =
(πD / 4)(s )
2
c
Spiral
Approximate:
4 Asp
actual ρ s =
Dc s

Ds
Figure 1. Definition of Dc and Ds

CHAPTER 9b. COLUMNS Slide No. 15


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Analysis of Short Columns:


Small Eccentricity
Q Example 2 (cont’d)
 Ag  f′  254.5  3
ρ s (min ) = 0.45 − 1 c = 0.45 − 1 = 0.0149
 Ac  fy  176.7  40
ρ s (min ) = 0.0149 ≈ 0.0147 OK (slightly underreinforced)

Clear distance between spiral loops:


3
clear distance = 2 - = 1.63 in
8
1′′ < 1.63′′ < 3′′
Therefore, 3/8 in dia. spiral @ 2-in. is OK

8
CHAPTER 9b. COLUMNS Slide No. 16
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Design of Short Columns: Small


Eccentricity
Q The design of reinforced concrete
columns involves the following:
– Proportioning of the steel and concrete
areas.
– Selection of properly sized and spaced ties
or spirals.
Q Since the ratio of steel to concrete area
must fall within a given range:
0.01 ≤ ρ g ≤ 0.08

CHAPTER 9b. COLUMNS Slide No. 17


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Design of Short Columns: Small


Eccentricity
The main strength equation is modified
as follows to include this term:
For tied column:
[
φPn (max ) = 0.80φ 0.85 f ′(Ag − Ast )c + f y Ast ] (2)
Ast
ρg = ⇒ Ast = ρ g Ag
Ag (3)
Therefore,
[
φPn (max ) = 0.80φ 0.85 f ′(Ag − ρAg )c + f y ρ g Ag ]
(4)
[
= 0.80φAg 0.85 f ′(1 − ρ )c + f y ρ g ]

9
CHAPTER 9b. COLUMNS Slide No. 18
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Design of Short Columns: Small


Eccentricity
Q Since

Pu ≤ φPn (max ) (5)

an expression can be written for


required Ag in terms of the material
strength, Pu and ρg.

CHAPTER 9b. COLUMNS Slide No. 19


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Design of Short Columns: Small


Eccentricity
Q For Tied Columns:
Pu (6)
required Ag =
[
0.80φ 0.85 f c′(1 − ρ g ) + f y ρ g ]
Q For Spiral Columns:
Pu
required Ag = (7)
[
0.85φ 0.85 f c′(1 − ρ g ) + f y ρ g ]

10
CHAPTER 9b. COLUMNS Slide No. 20
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Design of Short Columns: Small


Eccentricity
Q Procedure for Design of Short
Columns with Small Eccentricities
1. Establish the material strengths.
Establish the desired ρg (if any).
2. Establish the factored axial load Pu.
3. Determine the required gross column
area Ag.
4. Select the column dimensions. Use full-
inch increments.

CHAPTER 9b. COLUMNS Slide No. 21


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Design of Short Columns: Small


Eccentricity
5. Find the load carried by the concrete and
the load required to be carried by the
longitudinal steel. Determine the required
longitudinal steel area. Select the
longitudinal steel.
6. Design the lateral reinforcing (ties or
spiral).
7. Sketch the design.

11
CHAPTER 9b. COLUMNS Slide No. 22
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Design of Short Columns: Small


Eccentricity
Q Example 3
Design a square-tied column to carry axial
service loads of 320 kips dead load and
190 kips live load. There is no identified
applied moment. Assume that the column
is short. Use ρg about 0.03, f c′ = 4000 psi,
and fy = 60,000 psi.

CHAPTER 9b. COLUMNS Slide No. 23


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Design of Short Columns: Small


Eccentricity
Q Example 3 (cont’d)
1. Given values are as follows:
ρg =0.03, f c′ = 4000 psi, and fy = 60,000 psi
2. The factored axial load is
Pu = 1.4(320) + 1.7(190) = 771 kips
3. The required gross column area is (from Eq.
1)
Pu
required Ag =
0.80φ [0.85 f c′(1 − ρ g ) + f y ρ g ]

12
CHAPTER 9b. COLUMNS Slide No. 24
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Design of Short Columns: Small


Eccentricity
Q Example 3 (cont’d)
771
required Ag = = 270 in 2
0.80(0.70)[0.85(4 )(1 − 0.03) + (60)(0.03)]

4. The required size of a square column will


be
270 = 16.4 in.
Use a 16-in.-square column. This choice
will require that the actual ρg be slightly in
excess of 0.03
actual Ag = (16 ) = 256 in 2
2

CHAPTER 9b. COLUMNS Slide No. 25


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Design of Short Columns: Small


Eccentricity
Q Example 3 (cont’d)
5. The load on the concrete is

load on concrete = 0.80φ (0.85 f c′)Ag (1 − ρ g )


= 0.80(0.70 )(0.85)(4 )(256)(1 − 0.03)
= 473 kips

Therefore, the load to be carried by the


steel is
load by steel = 771 − 473 = 298 kips

13
CHAPTER 9b. COLUMNS Slide No. 26
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Design of Short Columns: Small


Eccentricity
Q Example 3 (cont’d)
The required steel area can be calculated
from
298
required Ag = = 8.87 in 2
0.80(0.70)(60 )
Use eight No. 10 bars (Ast =10.16 in2), see
Table 1.
Table 2 (Table A-14, Text) indicates a
maximum of eight No. 10 bars for a 13-in.
core. OK

CHAPTER 9b. COLUMNS Slide No. 27


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Design of Short Columns: Small


Eccentricity
Table 1. Areas of Multiple of Reinforcing Bars (in2)
Number Bar number
of bars #3 #4 $5 #6 #7 #8 #9 #10 #11
1 0.11 0.20 0.31 0.44 0.60 0.79 1.00 1.27 1.56
2 0.22 0.40 0.62 0.88 1.20 1.58 2.00 2.54 3.12
3 0.33 0.60 0.93 1.32 1.80 2.37 3.00 3.81 4.68
4 0.44 0.80 1.24 1.76 2.40 3.16 4.00 5.08 6.24
5 0.55 1.00 1.55 2.20 3.00 3.95 5.00 6.35 7.80
6 0.66 1.20 1.86 2.64 3.60 4.74 6.00 7.62 9.36
7 0.77 1.40 2.17 3.08 4.20 5.53 7.00 8.89 10.92
8 0.88 1.60 2.48 3.52 4.80 6.32 8.00 10.16 12.48
9 0.99 1.80 2.79 3.96 5.40 7.11 9.00 11.43 14.04
10 1.10 2.00 3.10 4.40 6.00 7.90 10.00 12.70 15.60

Table A-2 Textbook

14
CHAPTER 9b. COLUMNS Slide No. 28
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Design of Short Columns: Small


Eccentricity Table A-14, Textbook
Table 2. Preferred Maximum Number of Column Bars in One Row
Q Table 1

CHAPTER 9b. COLUMNS Slide No. 29


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Design of Short Columns: Small


Eccentricity
Q Example 3 (cont’d)
6. Design the ties. From Table 1 (Table A-
14, Textbook), select a No. 3 tie. The
spacing must be greater than the smaller
of

48 tie - bar diameter = 48(3/8) = 18 in.


16 longitudinal - bar diamater = 16(1.27 ) = 20.3 in.
least column dimension = 16 in. Controls

15
CHAPTER 9b. COLUMNS Slide No. 30
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Design of Short Columns: Small


Eccentricity
Q Example 3 (cont’d)
Use No. 3 ties spaced 16 in. o.c. Check
the arrangement with reference to the
figure. The clear space between
adjacent bars in the same face is
2 (1.5 in.) Cover 2 × dia. of No. 3 tie
16 − 3 − 0.75 − 3(1.27 )
= 4.22 in. < 6.0 in.
2 dia. of No. 10 bar
Therefore, no additional ties are required
by the ACI Code.

CHAPTER 9b. COLUMNS Slide No. 31


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Design of Short Columns: Small


Eccentricity
Q Example 3 (cont’d)

Table 3. Reinforced Steel Properties Table A-1 Textbook


Bar number 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 14 18
Unit weight 0.376 0.668 1.043 1.502 2.044 2.670 3.400 4.303 5.313 7.650 13.60
per foot (lb)
Diameter (in.) 0.375 0.500 0.625 0.750 0.875 1.000 1.128 1.270 1.410 1.693 2.257
2
Area (in ) 0.11 0.20 0.31 0.44 0.60 0.79 1.00 1.27 1.56 2.25 4.00

16
CHAPTER 9b. COLUMNS Slide No. 32
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Design of Short Columns: Small


Eccentricity
Q Example 3 (cont’d)
7. The design sketch is as follows:
16′′

1
1 cover
2
16′′
#3 ties @ 16′′ o.c.

8-#10 bars

17
Reinforced Concrete Design Fifth Edition
CHAPTER

COLUMNS
• A. J. Clark School of Engineering •Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering

Part I – Concrete Design and Analysis

By

9c
FALL 2002 Dr . Ibrahim. Assakkaf

ENCE 355 - Introduction to Structural Design


Department of Civil and Environmental Engineering
University of Maryland, College Park

CHAPTER 9c. COLUMNS Slide No. 1

The Load-Moment Relationship


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Axial Load-Moment Combination


– Assume that Pu is applied to a cross
section at an eccentricity e from the
centroid, as shown in Fig. 1a and 1b.
– Add equal and opposite forces Pu at the
centroid of the cross section, as shown in
Fig. 1c.
– The original eccentric force Pu may noe be
combined with the upward force Pu to form
a couple Pue, that is a pure moment.

1
CHAPTER 9c. COLUMNS Slide No. 2

The Load-Moment Relationship


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Axial Load-Moment Combination

Pu Figure 1
e
Pu Pu
e e Pu e
Pu

= =
(a)
(b) (c) (d)

CHAPTER 9c. COLUMNS Slide No. 3

The Load-Moment Relationship


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Axial Load-Moment Combination


– This will leave remaining one force, Pu
acting downward at the centroid of the
cross section.
– It can be therefore be seen that if a force
Pu is applied with an eccentricity e, the
situation that results is identical to the case
where an axial load of Pu at the centroid
and a moment of Pue are simultaneously
applied as shown in Fig. 1d.

2
CHAPTER 9c. COLUMNS Slide No. 4

The Load-Moment Relationship


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Axial Load-Moment Combination


– If Mu is defined as the factored moment to
be applied on a compression member
along with a factored axial load of Pu at the
centroid, the relationship between the two
can expressed as
Mu
e= (1)
Pu

CHAPTER 9c. COLUMNS Slide No. 5

The Load-Moment Relationship


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Eccentric Axial Loading in A Plane of


Symmetry
Figure 2
y y y

C
σx = C
σx + C σx

σ x = (σ x )centric + (σ x )bending

3
CHAPTER 9c. COLUMNS Slide No. 6

The Load-Moment Relationship


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Eccentric Axial Loading in A Plane of


Symmetry
The stress due to eccentric loading on a
beam cross section is given by
P My
σx = ± (2)
D C
E
A I
B
P A P

CHAPTER 9c. COLUMNS Slide No. 7

The Load-Moment Relationship


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Equivalent Force System for Eccentric


Loading
Figure 3
P =4.8 kN
P = 4.8 kN y M x = 4.8(40 ) = 192 kN ⋅ m
M z = 4.8(60 − 35) = 120 kN ⋅ m

Mx = 192 kN·m
m
m y
120 mm 80
Mz = 120 kN·m
x
z
35 mm

4
CHAPTER 9c. COLUMNS Slide No. 8

The Load-Moment Relationship


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1
The T-section shown in Fig. 50 is used as
a short post to support a compressive load
P of 150 kips. The load is applied on
centerline of the stem at a distance e = 2
in. from the centroid of the cross section.
Determine the normal stresses at points A
and B on a transverse plane C-C near the
base of the post.

CHAPTER 9c. COLUMNS Slide No. 9

The Load-Moment Relationship


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1 (cont’d)

P
e
6 in 2 in

2 in • • 6 in

C C
Section C-C

5
CHAPTER 9c. COLUMNS Slide No. 10

The Load-Moment Relationship


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1 (cont’d)
Computing the cross-sectional properties:
Area = A = 2[6 × 2] = 24 in 2
3(6 × 2) + (6 + 1)(6 × 2)
xC = = 5 in. from point A
24
6 in 2 in

2(5) 6(3) 4(1)


3 3 3

2 in • • 6 in Iy = + − = 136 in 4
3 3 3
xC = 5 in

N.A.

CHAPTER 9c. COLUMNS Slide No. 11

The Load-Moment Relationship


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Q Example 1 (cont’d)
Equivalent force system:
P = 150 kip acts through centroid
M = Pe = (150)(2 )× 12 = 3,600 kip ⋅ in
Computations of normal stresses:
P My 150 300(5)
σA = − + =− + = 4.78 ksi (T)
A Ix 24 136
P My 150 300(3)
σB = − − =− − = - 12.87 ksi (C)
A Ix 24 136

6
CHAPTER 9c. COLUMNS Slide No. 12
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Analysis of Short Columns:


Large Eccentricity
Q The first step in the investigation of
short columns carrying loads at
eccentricity is to determine the strength
of given column cross section that
carries load at various eccentricities.
Q For this, the design axial load strength
φPn is found, where Pn is defined as the
nominal axial load strength at a given
eccentricity.

CHAPTER 9c. COLUMNS Slide No. 13


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Analysis of Short Columns:


Large Eccentricity
Q Example 2
Find the design axial load strength φPn for
the tied column for the following conditions:
(a) small eccentricity, (b) pure moment, (c)
e = 5 in., and (d) the balanced condition.
The column cross section is shown.
Assume a short column. Bending about
the Y-Y axis. Use f c′ = 4000 psi and fy =
60,000 psi.

7
CHAPTER 9c. COLUMNS Slide No. 14
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Analysis of Short Columns:


Large Eccentricity
Q Example 2 (cont’d)
20′′
6−#9 bars
Y

X X 14′′

Y
14′′

CHAPTER 9c. COLUMNS Slide No. 15


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Analysis of Short Columns:


Large Eccentricity
Q Example 2 (cont’d)
(a) Small Eccentricity:
Ag = 14(20 ) = 280 in 2
Ast = 6 in 2 (area of 6− #9 bars)

φPn = φPn (max)


[
= 0.80φ 0.85 f c′(Ag − Ast ) + f y Ast ]
= 0.80(0.70 )[0.85(4)(280 − 6 ) + (60 )(6 )]
= 723 kips

8
CHAPTER 9c. COLUMNS Slide No. 16
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Analysis of Short Columns:


Large Eccentricity
Q Example 2 (cont’d)
(b) Pure Moment:
The analysis of the pure moment condition
is similar to the analysis of the case where
the eccentricity e is infinite as shown in
Fig. 4.
The design moment φMn will be found
since Pu and φPn will both be zero.
Assume that As is at yield, and then with
reference to Fig. 5, then

CHAPTER 9c. COLUMNS Slide No. 17


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Analysis of Short Columns:


Large Eccentricity
Q Example 2 (cont’d)

Figure 4
Pu
e=∞

9
CHAPTER 9c. COLUMNS Slide No. 18
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Analysis of Short Columns:


Large Eccentricity
Q Example 2 (cont’d)
C1 = concrete compressive force
C2 = steel compressive force
T = steel tensile force

ε s′ 0.003 c −3
= ⇒ ε s′ = 0.003 (3)
c −3 c c
Since
f s′ = Esε s′ (4)

CHAPTER 9c. COLUMNS Slide No. 19


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Analysis of Short Columns:


Large Eccentricity
Q Example 2 (cont’d) Figure 5
3′′ 3′′ 0.85 f c′
As′ ε s′
0.003

C2
c 0.85c C1
Z2
17′′ As Z1
φM n εy T

Strain Stress and Force


(a) (b) (c) (d)

10
CHAPTER 9c. COLUMNS Slide No. 20
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Analysis of Short Columns:


Large Eccentricity
Q Example 2 (cont’d)
Substituting Es = 29 × 106 psi and ε s′ given
by Eq. 3 into Eq. 4, gives
c−3 c −3
f s′ = 29 × 106 (0.003) = 87 (4)
c c
For equilibrium in Fig 4d,

C1 + C2 = T (5)

Substituting into above equation, yields

CHAPTER 9c. COLUMNS Slide No. 21


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Analysis of Short Columns:


Large Eccentricity
Q Example 2 (cont’d)
(0.85 f c )(0.85c )b + f s′As′ − 0.85 f c′As′ = f y As (6a)

(0.85)(4)(0.85c ) + 87 c − 3 (3) − 0.85(4)(3) = 3(60) (6b)


c
– The above equation can be solved for c to
give
c = 3.62 in.
and thus,
3.62 − 3
f s′ = 87 = 14.90 ksi (compression) (7)
3.62

11
CHAPTER 9c. COLUMNS Slide No. 22
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Analysis of Short Columns:


Large Eccentricity
Table 1. Areas of Multiple of Reinforcing Bars (in2)
Number Bar number
of bars #3 #4 $5 #6 #7 #8 #9 #10 #11
1 0.11 0.20 0.31 0.44 0.60 0.79 1.00 1.27 1.56
2 0.22 0.40 0.62 0.88 1.20 1.58 2.00 2.54 3.12
3 0.33 0.60 0.93 1.32 1.80 2.37 3.00 3.81 4.68
4 0.44 0.80 1.24 1.76 2.40 3.16 4.00 5.08 6.24
5 0.55 1.00 1.55 2.20 3.00 3.95 5.00 6.35 7.80
6 0.66 1.20 1.86 2.64 3.60 4.74 6.00 7.62 9.36
7 0.77 1.40 2.17 3.08 4.20 5.53 7.00 8.89 10.92
8 0.88 1.60 2.48 3.52 4.80 6.32 8.00 10.16 12.48
9 0.99 1.80 2.79 3.96 5.40 7.11 9.00 11.43 14.04
10 1.10 2.00 3.10 4.40 6.00 7.90 10.00 12.70 15.60

Table A-2 Textbook

CHAPTER 9c. COLUMNS Slide No. 23


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Analysis of Short Columns:


Large Eccentricity
Q Example 2 (cont’d)
Therefore, the forces will be
C1 = 0.85 f c′(0.85c )b = 0.85(4)(0.85)(3.62)(14) = 146.5 kips
C2 = f s′As′ − 0.85 f c′As′ = 14.9(3) − 0.85(4 )(3) = 34.5 kips

– The internal Moments are


146.5  0.85(3.62 ) 
M n1 = C1Z1 = 17 −  = 188.8 ft - kips
12  2
34.5(14 )
M n 2 = C2 Z 2 = = 40.3 ft - kips
12

12
CHAPTER 9c. COLUMNS Slide No. 24
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Analysis of Short Columns:


Large Eccentricity
Q Example 2 (cont’d) Figure 5
3′′ 3′′ 0.85 f c′
As′ ε s′
0.003

C2
c 0.85c C1
Z2
17′′ As Z1
φM n ε
y T
or more

Strain Stress and Force


(a) (b) (c) (d)

CHAPTER 9c. COLUMNS Slide No. 25


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Analysis of Short Columns:


Large Eccentricity
Q Example 2 (cont’d)
Therefore,
M n = M n1 + M n 2 = 188.8 + 40.3 = 229 ft - kips
and

φM n = 0.7(229) = 160 ft - kips

13
CHAPTER 9c. COLUMNS Slide No. 26
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Analysis of Short Columns:


Large Eccentricity
Q Example 2 (cont’d)
(c) The eccentricity e = 5 in:
The situation of e = 5 in. is shown in Fig. 6
Note that in Part (a), all steel was in
compression and in Part (b), the steel on the
side of the column away from the load was in
tension. Therefore, there is some value of the
eccentricity at which steel will change from
tension to compression. Since this is not
known, the strain in Fig. 7 is assumed.

CHAPTER 9c. COLUMNS Slide No. 27


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Analysis of Short Columns:


Large Eccentricity
Q Example 2 (cont’d)

Pu Figure 6
e = 5′′
Y

14
CHAPTER 9c. COLUMNS Slide No. 28
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Analysis of Short Columns:


Large Eccentricity
Q Example 2 (cont’d) Figure 7
3′′ 0.85 f c′
As′ ε s′
0.003

C2
Pn c 0.85c C1
d = 17′′
5′′ As Z2
Z1
12′′
εs T

Comp./tens.? Assumed Strain Stress and Force


(a) (b) (c) (d)

CHAPTER 9c. COLUMNS Slide No. 29


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Analysis of Short Columns:


Large Eccentricity
Q Example 2 (cont’d)
The assumptions at ultimate load are
1. Maximum concrete strain = 0.003
2. ε s′ > εy, therefore, f s′ =fy
3. εs is tensile
4. εs < εy and thus fs < fy
These assumptions will be verified later.
The unknown quantities are Pu and c.
The forces will be evaluated as follows:

15
CHAPTER 9c. COLUMNS Slide No. 30
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Analysis of Short Columns:


Large Eccentricity ε′ s
0.003

Q Example 2 (cont’d)
c
C1 = 0.85 f c′ab = 0.85(4 )(0.85c )(14 ) − 40.46c
d
C2 = f y As′ − 0.85 f c′As′
= 60(3) − 0.85(4 )(3) = 169.8 kips
εs
d −c
T = f s As = ε s Es As = 87  As εs d −c
 c  0.003
=
c
 17 − c  17 − c ε s = 0.003
d −c
, and
= 87 3 = 261 c
 c  c  d −c d −c
f s = ε s Es =  0.003 29 ×10 = 87
3

From ∑ moments = 0 in Fig. 7c :  c  c

Pn = C1 + C2 − T
17 − c
= 40.46c + 169.8 − 261 (8)
c

CHAPTER 9c. COLUMNS Slide No. 31


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Analysis of Short Columns:


Large Eccentricity
Q Example 2 (cont’d)
From ∑ moments = 0, taking moments about T in
Fig. 7d
 a
Pn (12 ) = C1  d −  + C2 (14)
 2 (9)
1   0.85c  
= 40.46c17 −  + 169.8(`14 )
12   2  

Eqs. 8 and 9 can be solved simultaneously for c to


give
c = 14.86 in.
Pn = 733 kips

16
CHAPTER 9c. COLUMNS Slide No. 32
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Analysis of Short Columns:


Large Eccentricity
Q Example 2 (cont’d)
Now, the assumptions can be checked:
 14.86 − 3 
ε s′ =  (0.003) = 0.0024
 14.86 
fy 60,000
εy = = = 0.00207 < (ε s′ = 0.0024) OK
Es 29 × 106

Therefore, f s′ = fy, and based on the location


of the neutral axis:
 17 − 14.86 
f s = 87  = 12.53 ksi < 60 ksi OK
 14.86 

CHAPTER 9c. COLUMNS Slide No. 33


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Analysis of Short Columns:


Large Eccentricity
Q Example 2 (cont’d)
– The design moment for an eccentricity of 5
in. can be computed as follows:
Pu = φPn = 0.7(733) = 513 kips
513(5)
φM n = φPn e = = 214 ft - kips
12
– Therefore, the given column has a design
load-moment combination strength of 513
kips axial load and 214 ft-kips moment.

17
CHAPTER 9c. COLUMNS Slide No. 34
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Analysis of Short Columns:


Large Eccentricity
Q Example 2 (cont’d)
(d) The Balanced Condition Case:
The balanced condition is defined when the
concrete reaches a strain of 0.003 at the same
time that the tension steel reaches its yield
strian, as shown in Fig. 8c.
The value of cb can be calculated from
87 87
cb = d= (17 ) = 10.06 in.
87 + f y 87 + 60

CHAPTER 9c. COLUMNS Slide No. 35


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Analysis of Short Columns:


Large Eccentricity
Q Example 2 (cont’d) Figure 8
3′′ 0.85 f c′
As′ ε s′
0.003

Pb
C2
cb 0.85c C1
eb
d = 17′′
As
εy T
0 00207

Strain Stress and Force


(a) (b) (c) (d)

18
CHAPTER 9c. COLUMNS Slide No. 36
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Analysis of Short Columns:


Large Eccentricity
Q Example 2 (cont’d)
10.06 − 3
ε s′ = (0.003) = 0.0021 > ε y = 0.00207
10.06

Therefore, f s′ = fy = 60 ksi
The forces can computed as follows:
C1 = 0.85(4)(0.85)(10.06)(14) = 407 kips
C 2 = 60(3) − 0.85(4)(3) = 170 kips
T = 60(3) = 180 kips
Pb = C1 + C2 − T = 407 + 170 − 180 = 397 kips

CHAPTER 9c. COLUMNS Slide No. 37


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Analysis of Short Columns:


Large Eccentricity
Q Example 2 (cont’d)
– The value of eb may be calculated by
summing moments about T as follows:
 0.85cb 
Pe (eb + 7 ) = C1  d −  + C2 (14)
 2 
 0.85(10.06)2 
397(eb + 7 ) = 407 17 −  + 170(14)
 2 

– From which, eb = 12.0 in. Therefore, at the


balanced condition:
φPb = 0.70(397 ) = 278 kips
278(12)
φM n = φPb eb = = 278 ft - kips
12

19
CHAPTER 9c. COLUMNS Slide No. 38
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Analysis of Short Columns:


Large Eccentricity
Q Example 2 (cont’d)
– The results of the four parts can be tabulated
(see Table 2) and plotted as shown in Fig. 9.
– This plot is called an “interaction diagram”.
– In the plot, any point on the solid line
represents an allowable combination of load
and moment.
– Any point within the solid line represents a
load-moment combination that is also
allowable, but for which this column is
overdesigned.

CHAPTER 9c. COLUMNS Slide No. 39


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Analysis of Short Columns:


Large Eccentricity
Q Example 2 (cont’d)
Table 2
Axial load strength Moment strength
e
(φPn,kips) (φPne, ft- kips)

Small 723 0 (small)

Infinite 0 160

5 in. 513 214

12 in 278 278

20
CHAPTER 9c. COLUMNS Slide No. 40
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Analysis of Short Columns:


Large Eccentricity
φPn (kips)
800
Figure 9. Column Interaction Diagram
700 Compression Failure
600
Balanced condition
e=0

500

400

300 5 in.
e= 12 in.
200 e = eb =
100
Tensile Failure
0 e=∝
0 50 100 150 200 250 300
Mo me nt
Bending Strength of Member
Moment φPn e (ft - kips)

CHAPTER 9c. COLUMNS Slide No. 41


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Analysis of Short Columns:


Large Eccentricity
Q Example 2 (cont’d)
– Any point outside the solid line represents an
unaccepted load-moment combination or a
load-moment combination for which this
column is underdesigned.
– Radial lines from the origin represent various
eccentricities (slope = φPn/φPn or 1/e).
– Any eccentricity less than eb will result in
compression controlling the column, and any
eccentricity greater than eb will result in
tension controlling the column.

21
CHAPTER 9c. COLUMNS Slide No. 42
ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Design of Short Columns: Large


Eccentricity
Q The design of a column cross section
using the previous calculation approach
would be a trial-and-error method and
would become exceedingly tedious.
Q Therefore, design and analysis aids
have been developed that shorten the
process to a great extent.
Q A chart approach has been developed
in ACI Publication SP-17 (97), ACI
Design Handbook.

CHAPTER 9c. COLUMNS Slide No. 43


ENCE 355 ©Assakkaf

Design of Short Columns: Large


Eccentricity
Q The charts take on the general form of
Figure 9 but are set up to be more
general so that they will remain
applicable if various code criteria
undergo changes.
Q These charts can be used for both
analysis and design of columns.
Q There are also computer programs
available to aid in the design process.

22

Вам также может понравиться